WO2022087419A1 - Timing advance (ta) configurations for iab networks - Google Patents

Timing advance (ta) configurations for iab networks Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022087419A1
WO2022087419A1 PCT/US2021/056263 US2021056263W WO2022087419A1 WO 2022087419 A1 WO2022087419 A1 WO 2022087419A1 US 2021056263 W US2021056263 W US 2021056263W WO 2022087419 A1 WO2022087419 A1 WO 2022087419A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
parent
iab node
function
iab
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2021/056263
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Lili WEI
Qian Li
Geng Wu
Original Assignee
Intel Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Intel Corporation filed Critical Intel Corporation
Publication of WO2022087419A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022087419A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/004Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay
    • H04W56/0045Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay compensating for timing error by altering transmission time
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/001Synchronization between nodes
    • H04W56/0015Synchronization between nodes one node acting as a reference for the others

Definitions

  • aspects pertain to wireless communications. Some aspects relate to wireless networks including 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) networks, 3GPP LTE (Long Term Evolution) networks, 3GPP LTE-A (LTE Advanced) networks, (MulteFire, LTE-U), and fifth-generation (5G) networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc.
  • 5G networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc.
  • TA timing advance
  • 5G-NR networks will continue to evolve based on 3GPP LTE- Advanced with additional potential new radio access technologies (RATs) to enrich people's lives with seamless wireless connectivity solutions delivering fast, rich content and services.
  • RATs new radio access technologies
  • mmWave millimeter wave
  • LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum includes (and is not limited to) the LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum via dual connectivity (DC), or DC-based LAA, and the standalone LTE system in the unlicensed spectrum, according to which LTE-based technology solely operates in the unlicensed spectrum without requiring an “anchor” in the licensed spectrum, called MulteFire.
  • Further enhanced operation of LTE and NR systems in the licensed, as well as unlicensed spectrum, is expected in future releases and 5G systems.
  • Such enhanced operations can include techniques for supporting TA configurations in IAB networks.
  • FIG. 1 A illustrates an architecture of a network, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. IB and FIG. 1C illustrate a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a reference diagram of an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU) - distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates IAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • MT parent IAB node mobile termination
  • DU parent IAB node distributed unit
  • FIG. 9 illustrates TA case1 /T p /T g relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects.
  • eNB evolved Node-B
  • gNB new generation Node-B
  • AP access point
  • STA wireless station
  • MS mobile station
  • UE user equipment
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an architecture of a network in accordance with some aspects.
  • the network 140A is shown to include user equipment (UE)
  • UE user equipment
  • the UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • PDAs Personal Data Assistants
  • the UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • PDAs Personal Data Assistants
  • pagers pagers
  • laptop computers desktop computers
  • wireless handsets wireless handsets
  • drones or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • UE 101 can be collectively referred to herein as UE 101, and UE 101 can be used to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
  • Any of the radio links described herein may operate according to any exemplary radio communication technology and/or standard.
  • LTE and LTE- Advanced are standards for wireless communications of high-speed data for UE such as mobile telephones.
  • carrier aggregation is a technology- according to which multiple carrier signals operating on different frequencies may be used to cany communications for a single UE, thus increasing the bandwidth available to a single device.
  • carrier aggregation may- be used where one or more component carriers operate on unlicensed frequencies.
  • aspects described herein can be used in the context of any spectrum management scheme including, for example, dedicated licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, (licensed) shared spectrum (such as Licensed Shared Access (LSA) in 2.3-2.4 GHz, 3.4-3.6 GHz, 3.6-3.8 GHz, and further frequencies and Spectrum Access System (SAS) m 3.55-3.7 GHz and further frequencies).
  • LSA Licensed Shared Access
  • SAS Spectrum Access System
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can comprise an Internet-of-Things (loT) UE or a Cellular loT (CIoT) UE, which can comprise a network access layer designed for low-power loT applications utilizing short- lived UE connections.
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include a narrowband (NB) loT UE (e.g., such as an enhanced NB-IoT (eNB-IoT) UE and Further Enhanced (FeNB-loT) UE).
  • NB narrowband
  • eNB-IoT enhanced NB-IoT
  • FeNB-loT Further Enhanced
  • An loT UE can utilize technologies such as machine-to-machine (M2M) or machine-type communications (MTC) for exchanging data with an MTC server or device via a public land mobile network (PLMN), Proximity-Based Service (ProSe), or device-to-device (D2D) communication, sensor networks, or loT networks.
  • M2M or MTC exchange of data may be a machine-initiated exchange of data.
  • An loT network includes interconnecting loT UEs, which may include uniquely identifiable embedded computing devices (within the Internet infrastructure), with short-lived connections.
  • the loT UEs may execute background applications (e.g., keep- alive messages, status updates, etc.) to facilitate the connections of the loT network.
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include enhanced MTC (eMTC) UEs or further enhanced MTC (FeMTC) UEs.
  • the UEs 101 and 102 may be configured to connect, e.g., communicatively couple, with a radio access network (RAN) 110.
  • the RAN 110 may be, for example, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), a NextGen RAN (NG RAN), or some other type of RAN.
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • NG RAN NextGen RAN
  • the UEs 101 and 102 utilize connections 103 and 104, respectively, each of which comprises a physical communications interface or layer (discussed in further detail below); in this example, the connections 103 and 104 are illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols, such as a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) protocol, a code-division multiple access (CDMA) network protocol, a Push-to-Talk (PTT) protocol, a PTT over Cellular (POC) protocol, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) protocol, a 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) protocol, a fifth-generation (5G) protocol, a New Radio (NR) protocol, and the like.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • CDMA code-division multiple access
  • PTT Push-to-Talk
  • POC PTT over Cellular
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • NR New Radio
  • the UEs 101 and 102 may further directly exchange communication data via a ProSe interface 105.
  • the ProSe interface 105 may alternatively be referred to as a sidelink interface comprising one or more logical channels, including but not limited to a Physical Sidelink Control Channel (PSCCH), a Physical Sidelink Shared Channel (PSSCH), a Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel (PSDCH), and a Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel (PSBCH).
  • PSCCH Physical Sidelink Control Channel
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • PSDCH Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the UE 102 is shown to be configured to access an access point (AP) 106 via connection 107.
  • the connection 107 can comprise a local wireless connection, such as, for example, a connection consistent with any IEEE 802.11 protocol, according to which the AP 106 can comprise a wireless fidelity (WiFi®) router.
  • WiFi® wireless fidelity
  • the AP 106 is shown to be connected to the Internet without connecting to the core network of the wireless system (described in further detail below).
  • the RAN 110 can include one or more access nodes that, enable connections 103 and 104.
  • These access nodes can be referred to as base stations (BSs), NodeBs, evolved NodeBs (eNBs), Next Generation NodeBs (gNBs), RAN network nodes, and the like, and can comprise ground stations (e.g., terrestrial access points) or satellite stations providing coverage within a geographic area (e.g., a cell).
  • the communication nodes 111 and 112 can be transmission/reception points (TRPs).
  • the RAN 110 may include one or more RAN nodes for providing macrocells, e.g., macro RAN node 111, and one or more RAN nodes for providing femtocells or picocells (e.g., cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells), e.g., low power (LP) RAN node 112 or an unlicensed spectrum based secondary RAN node 112.
  • LP low power
  • any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can terminate the air interface protocol and can be the first point of contact for the UEs 101 and 102.
  • any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can fulfill various logical functions for the RAN 110 including, but not limited to, radio network controller (RNC) functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling, and mobility management.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • any of the nodes 111 and/or 112 can be a new generation Node-B (gNB), an evolved node-B (eNB), or another type of RAN node.
  • gNB Node-B
  • eNB evolved node-B
  • the RAN 110 is shown to be communicatively coupled to a core network (CN) 120 via an SI interface 113.
  • the CN 120 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) network, a NextGen Packet Core (NPC) network, or some other type of CN (e.g., as illustrated in reference to FIGS. 1B-1C).
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • NPC NextGen Packet Core
  • the SI interface 113 is split into two parts: the Sl-U interface 114, which carries user traffic data between the R AN nodes 111 and 112 and the serving gateway (S-GW) 122, and the SI -mobility management entity (MME) interface 115, which is a signaling interface between the RAN nodes 111 and 112 and MM I is 121.
  • S-GW serving gateway
  • MME SI -mobility management entity
  • the CN 120 comprises the MMEs 121, the S-GW 122, the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (P-GW) 123, and a home subscriber server (HSS) 124.
  • the MMEs 121 may be similar in function to the control plane of legacy Serving General Packet Radio Sendee (GPRS) Support Nodes (SGSN).
  • the MMEs 121 may manage mobility aspects in access such as gateway selection and tracking area list management.
  • the HSS 124 may comprise a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions.
  • the CN 120 may comprise one or several HSSs 124, depending on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment, on the organization of the network, etc.
  • the HSS 124 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/ addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc.
  • the S-GW 122 may termmate the SI interface 113 towards the RAN 110, and route data packets between the RAN 110 and the CN 120.
  • the S-GW 122 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities of the S-GW 122 may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
  • the P-GW 123 may terminate an SGi interface toward a PDN.
  • the P-GW 123 may route data packets between the EPC network 120 and external networks such as a network including the application server 184 (alternatively referred to as application function (AT)) via an Internet Protocol (IP) interface 125.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the P-GW 123 can also communicate data to other external networks 131 A, which can include the Internet, IP multimedia subsystem (IPS) network, and other networks.
  • the application server 184 may be an element offering applications that use IP bearer resources with the core network (e.g., UMTS Packet Services (PS) domain, LTE PS data services, etc.).
  • PS UMTS Packet Services
  • the P-GW 123 is shown to be communicatively coupled to an application server 184 via an IP interface 125.
  • the application server 184 can also be configured to support one or more communication services (e.g., Voice-over- Internet Protocol (VoIP) sessions, PTT sessions, group communication sessions, social networking services, etc.) for the UEs 101 and 102 via the CN 120.
  • VoIP Voice-over- Internet Protocol
  • the P-GW 123 may further be a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection.
  • Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) 126 is the policy and charging control element of the CN 120.
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • HPLMN Home Public Land Mobile Network
  • IP-CAN Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network
  • the PCRF 126 may be communicatively coupled to the application server 184 via the P-GW 123.
  • the communication network 140A can be an loT network or a 5G network, including a 5G new radio network using communications in the licensed (5G NR) and the unlicensed (5G NR-U) spectrum.
  • NB-IoT narrowband-IoT
  • An NG system architecture can include the RAN 110 and a 5G network core (5GC ) 120.
  • the NG-RAN 110 can include a plurality of nodes, such as gNBs and NG-eNBs.
  • the core network 120 e.g., a 5G core network or 5GC
  • AMF access and mobility function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the AMF and the UPF can be communicatively coupled to the gNBs and the NG-eNBs via NG interfaces. More specifically, in some aspects, the gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be connected to the AMF by NG-C interfaces, and to the UPF by NG-U interfaces. The gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be coupled to each other via Xn interfaces.
  • the NG system architecture can use reference points between various nodes as provided by 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 23.501 (e.g., V15.4.0, 2018-12).
  • TS 3GPP Technical Specification
  • each of the gNBs and the NG- eNBs can be implemented as a base station, a mobile edge server, a small cell, a home eNB, a RAN network node, and so forth.
  • a gNB can be a master node (MN) and NG-eNB can be a secondary node (SN) in a 5G architecture.
  • the master/primary node may operate in a licensed band and the secondary node may operate in an unlicensed band.
  • FIG. IB illustrates a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
  • a 5G system architecture 140B in a reference point representation. More specifically, UE 102 can be in communication with ILAN 110 as well as one or more other 5G core (5GC) network entities.
  • 5GC 5G core
  • the 5G system architecture 140B includes a plurality of network functions (NFs), such as access and mobility management function (AMF) 132, location management function (LMF) 133, session management function (SMF) 136, policy control function (PCF) 148, application function (AF) 150, user plane function (UPF) 134, network slice selection function (NSSF) 142, authentication server function (AUSF) 144, and unified data management (UDM)/home subscriber server (HSS) 146.
  • the UPF 134 can provide a connection to a data network (DN) 152, which can include, for example, operator services, Internet access, or third-party services.
  • DN data network
  • the AMF 132 can be used to manage access control and mobility and can also include network slice selection functionality.
  • the SMF 136 can be configured to set up and manage various sessions according to network policy.
  • the UPF 134 can be deployed in one or more configurations according to the desired service type.
  • the PCF 148 can be configured to provide a policy framework using network slicing, mobility management, and roaming (similar to PCRF in a 4G communication system).
  • the UDM can be configured to store subscriber profiles and data (similar to an HSS in a 4G communication system).
  • the LMF 133 may be used in connection with 5G positioning functionalities.
  • LMF 133 receives measurements and assistance information from the next generation radio access network (NG- RAN) 110 and the mobile device (e.g., LIE 101) via the AMF 132 over the NLs interface to compute the position of the UE 101.
  • NG-RAN next generation radio access network
  • NRPPa NR positioning protocol A
  • NCPa next generation control plane interface
  • LMF 133 configures the UE using the LTE positioning protocol (LPP) via AMF 132.
  • the NG RAN 110 configures the UE 101 using radio resource control (RRC) protocol over LTE-Uu and NR-Uu interfaces.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the 5G system architecture 140B configures different reference signals to enable positioning measurements.
  • Example reference signals that mav be used for positioning measurements include the positioning reference signal (NR PRS) in the downlink and the sounding reference signal (SRS) for positioning in the uplink.
  • the downlink positioning reference signal (PRS) is a reference signal configured to support downlink- based positioning methods.
  • the 5G system architecture 140B includes an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) 168B as wel l as a plurality of IP multimedia core network subsystem entities, such as call session control functions (CSCFs).
  • IMS IP multimedia subsystem
  • CSCFs call session control functions
  • the IMS 168B includes a CSCF, which can act as a proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) 162BE, a serving CSCF (S-CSCF) 164B, an emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) (not illustrated in FIG. IB), or interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) 166B.
  • the P-CSCF 162B can be configured to be the first contact point for the UE 102 within the IM subsystem (IMS) 168B.
  • the S-CSCF 164B can be configured to handle the session states in the network, and the E-CSCF can be configured to handle certain aspects of emergency sessions such as routing an emergency request to the correct emergency center or PSAP.
  • the I-CSCF 166B can be configured to function as the contact point within an operator's network for all IMS connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber currently located within that network operators service area.
  • the I-CSCF 166B can be connected to another IP multimedia network I70E, e.g. an IMS operated by a different network operator.
  • the UDM/HSS 146 can be coupled to an application server I60E, which can include a telephony application server (TAS) or another application server (AS).
  • the AS 160B can be coupled to the IMS 168B via the S-CSCF 164B or the I-CSCF 166B.
  • FIG. IB illustrates the following reference points: N1 (between the UE 102 and the AMF 132), N2 (between the RAN 110 and the AMF 132), N3 (between the RAN 110 and the UPF 134), N4 (between the SMF 136 and the UPF 134), N5 (between the PCF 148 and the AF 150, not shown), N6 (between the UPF 134 and the DN 152), N7 (between the SMF 136 and the PCF 148, not shown), N8 (between the UDM 146 and the AMF 132, not shown), N9 (between two UPFs 134, not shown), N10 (between the UDM 146 and the SMF 136, not shown), N11 (between the AMF 132 and the SMF 136, not shown), N12 (between the AUSF 144 and the AMF 132, not shown), N13 (between the AUSF 144 and the
  • FIG. 1C illustrates a 5G system architecture 140C and a sendee- based representation.
  • system architecture 140C can also include a network exposure function (NEF) 154 and a network repository function (NRF) 156.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • NRF network repository function
  • 5G system architectures can be service-based and interaction between network functions can be represented by corresponding point-to-point reference points Ni or as service-based interfaces.
  • service-based representations can be used to represent network functions within the control plane that enable other authorized network functions to access their services.
  • 5G system architecture 140C can include the following service- based interfaces: Namf 158H (a service-based interface exhibited by the AMF 132), Nsmf 1581 (a service-based interface exhibited by the SMF 136), Nnef 158B (a service-based interface exhibited by the NEF 154), Npcf 158D (a service-based interface exhibited by the PCF 148), a Nudm 158E (a service- based interface exhibited by the UDM 146), Naf 158F (a service-based interface exhibited by the AF 150), Nnrf 158C (a service-based interface exhibited by the NRF 156), Nnssf 158A (a service-based interface exhibited by the NSSF 142), Nausf 158G (a service-based interface exhibited by the a service-based interface exhibited by the
  • FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. 7 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments in different communication systems, such as 5G-NR networks including IAB networks.
  • UEs, base stations (such as gNBs), and/or other nodes (e.g., any of the communication nodes in an IAB network) discussed in connection with FIGS. 1A-13 can be configured to perform the disclosed techniques.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a network 200 in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the network 200 may operate in a manner consistent with 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems.
  • 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems.
  • the example embodiments are not limited in this regard and the described embodiments may apply to other networks that benefit from the principles described herein, such as future 3GPP systems, or the like.
  • the network 200 may include a UE 202, which may include any mobile or non-mobile computing device designed to communicate with a RAN 204 via an over-the-air connection.
  • the UE 202 may be, but is not limited to, a smartphone, tablet computer, wearable computing device, desktop computer, laptop computer, in-vehicle infotainment, in-car entertainment device, instrument cluster, head-up display device, onboard diagnostic device, dashtop mobile equipment, mobile data terminal, electronic engine management system, electronic/engine control unit, electronic/engine control module, embedded system, sensor, microcontroller, control module, engine management system, networked appliance, machine-type communication device, M2M or D2D device, loT device, etc.
  • the network 200 may include a plurality of UEs coupled directly with one another via a sidelink interface.
  • the UEs may be M2M/D2D devices that communicate using physical sidelink channels such as but not limited to, PSBCH, PSDCH, PSSCH, PSCCH, PSFCH, etc.
  • the UE 202 may additionally communicate with an AP 206 via an over-the-air connection.
  • the AP 206 may manage a WLAN connection, which may serve to offload some/all network traffic from the RAN 204.
  • the connection between the UE 202 and the AP 206 may be consistent with any IEEE 802. 11 protocol, wherein the AP 206 could be a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi®) router.
  • the UE 202, RAN 204, and AP 206 may utilize cellular- WLAN aggregation (for example, LWA/LWIP).
  • Cellular-WLAN aggregation may involve the UE 202 being configured by the RAN 204 to utilize both cellular radio resources and WLAN resources.
  • the RAN 204 may include one or more access nodes, for example, access node (AN) 208.
  • AN 208 may terminate air-interface protocols for the UE 202 by providing access stratum protocols including RRC, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), Radio Link Control (RLC), MAC, and LI protocols.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • LI protocols Low Latency Control
  • the AN 208 may enable data/voice connectivity between the core network (CN) 220 and the UE 202.
  • the AN 208 may be implemented in a discrete device or as one or more software entities miming on server computers as part of, for example, a virtual network, which may be referred to as a CRAN or virtual baseband unit pool.
  • the AN 208 be referred to as a BS, gNB, RAN node, eNB, ng-eNB, NodeB, RSU, TRxP, TRP, etc.
  • the AN 208 may be a macrocell base station or a low-power base station for providing femtocells, picocells, or other like cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells.
  • the RAN 204 may be coupled with one another via an X2 interface (if the RAN 204 is an LTE RAN) or an Xn interface (if the RAN 204 is a 5(3- RAN).
  • the X2/Xn interfaces which may be separated into control/user plane interfaces in some embodiments, may allow the ANs to communicate information related to handovers, data/context transfers, mobility, load management, interference coordination, etc.
  • the ANs of the RAN 204 may each manage one or more cells, cell groups, component carriers, etc. to provide the UE 202 with an air interface for network access.
  • the UE 202 may be simultaneously connected with a plurality of cells provided by the same or different ANs of the RAN 204.
  • the UE 202 and RAN 204 may use carrier aggregation to allow the UE 202 to connect with a plurality of component carriers, each corresponding to a Pcell or Scell.
  • a first AN may be a master node that provides an MCG and a second AN may be a secondary node that provides an SCG.
  • the first/second ANs may be any combination of eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, etc.
  • the RAN 204 may provide the air interface over a licensed spectrum or an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the nodes may use LAA, eLAA, and/or feLAA mechanisms based on CA technology with PCells/Scells.
  • the nodes may perform medium/carrier-sensing operations based on, for example, a listen-before-talk (LBT) protocol.
  • LBT listen-before-talk
  • the UE 202 or AN 208 may be or act as a roadside unit (RSU), which may refer to any transportation infrastructure entity used for V2X communications.
  • RSU may be implemented in or by a suitable AN or a stationary (or relatively stationary) UE.
  • An RSU implemented in or by: a UE may be referred to as a “UE-type RSU”; an eNB may be referred to as an “eNB-type RSU”, a gNB may be referred to as a “gNB-type RSU”; and the like.
  • an RSU is a computing device coupled with radio frequency circuitry located on a roadside that provides connectivity support to passing vehicle UEs.
  • the RSU may also include internal data storage circuitry' to store intersection map geometry, traffic statistics, media, as well as applications/ software to sense and control ongoing vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
  • the RSU may provide very low latency communications required for high-speed events, such as crash avoidance, traffic warnings, and the like. Additionally, or alternatively, the RSU may provide other cellular/WLAN communications services.
  • the components of the RSU may be packaged in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for outdoor installation and may include a network interface controller to provide a wired connection (e.g., Ethernet) to a traffic signal controller or a backhaul network.
  • the RAN 204 may be an LTE RAN 210 with eNBs, for example, eNB 212.
  • the LTE RAN 210 may provide an LTE air interface with the following characteristics: sub-carrier spacing (SCS) of 15 kHz; CP-OFDM waveform for downlink (DL) and SC-FDMA waveform for uplink (UL); turbo codes for data and TBCC for control; etc.
  • SCS sub-carrier spacing
  • DL downlink
  • UL uplink
  • turbo codes for data and TBCC for control
  • the LTE air interface may rely on CSI-RS for CSI acquisition and beam management;
  • the LTE air interface may operate on sub-6 GHz bands.
  • the RAN 204 may be an NG-RAN 214 with gNBs, for example, gNB 216, or ng-eNBs, for example, ng-eNB 218.
  • the gNB 216 may connect with 5G-enab1ed UEs using a 5G NR interface.
  • the gNB 216 may connect with a 5G core through an NG interface, which may include an N2 interface or an N3 interface.
  • the ng-eNB 218 may also connect with the 5G core through an NG interface but. may connect with a UE via an LTE air interface.
  • the gNB 216 and the ng-eNB 218 may connect over an Xn interface.
  • the NG interface may be split into two parts, an NG user plane (NG-U) interface, which carries traffic data between the nodes of the NG-RAN 214 and a UPF 248 (e.g., N3 interface), and an NG control plane (NG-C) interface, which is a signaling interface between the nodes of the NG-RAN214 and an AMF 244 (e.g., N2 interface).
  • NG-U NG user plane
  • N-C NG control plane
  • the NG-RAN 214 may provide a 5G-NR air interface with the following characteristics: variable SCS; CP-OFDM for DL, CP-OFDM and DFT-s-OFDM for UL, polar, repetition, simplex, and Reed-Muller codes for control and LDPC for data.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may rely on CSI-RS, PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS similar to the LTE air interface.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may not use a CRS but may use PBCH DMRS for PBCH demodulation; PTRS for phase tracking for PDSCH and tracking reference signal for time tracking.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may operate on FR1 bands that include sub-6 GHz bands or FR2 bands that include bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may include a synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) block (SSB ) that is an area of a downlink resource grid that includes PSS/SSS/PBCH.
  • SS/PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the 5G-NR air interface may utilize BWPs (bandwidth parts) for various purposes.
  • BWP can be used for dynamic adaptation of the SCS.
  • the UE 202 can be configured with multiple BWPs where each BWP configuration has a different SCS. When a BWP change is indicated to the UE 202, the SCS of the transmission is changed as well.
  • Another use case example of BWP is related to power saving.
  • multiple BWPs can be configured for the UE 202 with different amounts of frequency resources (for example, PRBs) to support data transmission under different traffic loading scenarios.
  • a BWP containing a smaller number of PRBs can be used for data transmission with a small traffic load while allowing power saving at the UE 202 and in some cases at the gNB 216.
  • a BWP containing a larger number of PRBs can be used for scenarios with higher traffic loads.
  • the RAN 204 is communicatively coupled to CN 220 that includes network elements to provide various functions to support data and telecommunications services to customers/subscribers (for example, users of UE 202).
  • the components of the CN 220 may be implemented in one physical node or separate physical nodes.
  • NFV may be utilized to virtualize any or all of the functions provided by the network elements of the CN 220 onto physical compute/storage resources in seivers, switches, etc.
  • a logical instantiation of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network slice, and a logical instantiation of a portion of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network sub- slice.
  • the CN 220 may be connected to the LTE radio network as part of the Enhanced Packet System (EPS) 222, which may also be referred to as an EPC (or enhanced packet core).
  • the EPC 222 may include MME 224, SGW 226, SGSN 228, HSS 230, PGW 232, and PCRF 234 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the EPC 222 may be briefly introduced as follows.
  • the MME 224 may implement mobility management functions to track the current location of the UE 202 to facilitate paging, bearer activation/deactivation, handovers, gateway selection, authentication, etc.
  • the SGW 226 may terminate an SI interface toward the RAN and route data packets between the RAN and the EPC 222.
  • the SGW 226 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
  • the SGSN 228 may track the location of the UE 202 and perform security functions and access control. In addition, the SGSN 228 may perform inter-EPC node signaling for mobility between different RAT networks; PDN and S-GW selection as specified by MME 224; MME selection for handovers, etc.
  • the S3 reference point between the MME 224 and the SGSN 228 may enable user and bearer information exchange for inter-3 GPP access network mobility in idle/active states.
  • the HSS 230 may include a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions.
  • the HSS 230 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc.
  • An S6a reference point between the HSS 230 and the MME 224 may enable the transfer of subscription and authentication data for authenticating/authorizing user access to the LTE CN 220.
  • the PGW 232 may terminate an SGi interface toward a data network (DN) 236 that may include an application/ content server 238.
  • the PGW 232 may route data packets between the LTE CN 220 and the data network 236.
  • the PGW 232 may be coupled with the SGW 226 by an S5 reference point to facilitate user plane tunneling and tunnel management.
  • the PGW 232 may further include a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection (for example, PCEF).
  • the SGi reference point between the PGW 232 and the data network 236 may be an operator external public, a private PDN, or an intra-operator packet data network, for example, for provision of IMS services.
  • the PGW 232 may be coupled with a PCRF 234 via a Gx reference point.
  • the PCRF 234 is the policy and charging control element of the LTE CN 220.
  • the PCRF 234 may be communicatively coupled to the app/content server 238 to determine appropriate QoS and charging parameters for service flows.
  • the PCRF 234 may provision associated rules into a PCEF (via Gx reference point) with appropriate ITT and QCI.
  • the CN 220 may be a 5GC 240.
  • the 5GC 240 may include an AUSF 242, AMF 244, SMF 246, UPF 248, NSSF 250, NEF 252, NRF 254, PCF 256, UDM 258, and AF 260 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown.
  • Functions of the elements of the 5GC 240 may be briefly introduced as follows.
  • the AUSF 242 may store data for authentication of UE 202 and handle authentication -related functionality.
  • the AUSF 242 may facilitate a common authentication framework for various access types.
  • the AUSF 242 may exhibit a Nausf service-based interface.
  • the AMF 244 may allow other functions of the 5GC 240 to communicate with the UE 202 and the RAN 204 and to subscribe to notifications about mobility events with respect to the UE 202.
  • the AMF 244 may be responsible for registration management (for example, for registering UE 202), connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception of AMF -related events, and access authentication and authorization.
  • the AMF 244 may provide transport for SM messages between the UE 202 and the SMF 246, and act as a transparent proxy for routing SM messages.
  • AMF 244 may also provide transport for SMS messages between UE 202 and an SMSF.
  • AMF 244 may interact with the AUSF 242 and the UE 202 to perform various security anchor and context management functions.
  • AMF 244 may be a termination point of a RAN CP interface, which may include or be an N2 reference point between the RAN 204 and the AMF 244; and the AMF 244 may be a termination point of NAS (Nl) signaling, and perform NAS ciphering and integrity protection.
  • AMF 244 may also support NAS signaling with the UE 202 over an N3 IWF interface.
  • the SMF 246 may be responsible for SM (for example, session establishment, tunnel management between UPF 248 and AN 208); UE IP address allocation and management (including optional authorization); selection and control of UP function, confi guring traffic steering at UPF 248 to route traffic to proper destination; termination of interfaces toward policy control functions; controlling part of policy enforcement, charging, and QoS; lawful intercept (for SM ⁇ events and interface to LI sy stem); termination of SM: parts of NAS messages; downlink data notification; initiating AN specific SM information, sent via AMF 244 over N2 to AN 208; and determining SSC mode of a session.
  • SM may refer to the management of a PDU session, and a PDU session or “session” may refer to a PDU connectivity service that provides or enables the exchange of PDUs between the UE 202 and the data network 236.
  • the UPF 248 may act as an anchor point for intra-RAT and inter- RAT mobility, an external PDU session point of interconnecting to data network 236, and a branching point to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
  • the UPF 248 may also perform packet routing and forwarding, perform packet inspection, enforce the user plane part of policy rules, lawfully intercept packets (UP collection), perform traffic usage reporting, perform QoS handling for a user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, UL/DL rate enforcement), perform uplink traffic verification (e.g., SDF-to-QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, and perform downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering.
  • UPF 248 may include an uplink classifier to support routing traffic flows to a data network.
  • the NSSF 250 may select a set of network slice instances serving the UE 202.
  • the NSSF 250 may also determine allowed NSSAI and the mapping to the subscribed S-NSSAIs if needed.
  • the NSSF 250 may also determine the AMF set to be used to serve the UE 202, or a list of candidate AMFs based on a suitable configuration and possibly by querying the NRF 254.
  • the selection of a set of network slice instances for the UE 202 may be triggered by the AMF 244 with which the UE 202 is registered by interacting with the NSSF 250, which may lead to a change of AMF.
  • the NSSF 250 may interact with the AMF 244 via an N22 reference point, and may communicate with another NSSF in a visited network via an N31 reference point (not shown). Additionally, the NSSF 250 may exhibit an Nnssf service-based interface.
  • the NEF 252 may securely expose services and capabilities provided by 3 GPP network functions for the third party, internal exposure/re- exposure, AFs (e.g., AF 260), edge computing or fog computing systems, etc.
  • the NEF 252 may authenticate, authorize, or throttle the AFs.
  • NEF 252 may also translate information exchanged with the AF 260 and information exchanged with internal network functions. For example, the NEF 252 may translate between an AF-Service-Identifier and an internal 5GC information.
  • NEF 252 may also receive information from other NFs based on the exposed capabilities of other NFs. This information may be stored at the NEF 252 as structured data, or a data storage NF using standardized interfaces. The stored information can then be re-exposed by the NEF 252 to other NFs and AFs, or used for other purposes such as analytics. Additionally, the NEF 252 may exhibit a Nnef service-based interface.
  • the NRF 254 may support service discovery' functions, receive NF discovery requests from NF instances, and provide the information of the discovered NF instances to the NF instances. NRF 254 also maintains information on available NF instances and their supported services. As used herein, the terms “instantiate,” “instantiation,” and the like may refer to the creation of an instance, and an “instance” may refer to a concrete occurrence of an object, which may occur, for example, during the execution of program code. Additionally, the NRF 254 may exhibit the Nnrf service-based interface.
  • the PCF 256 may provide policy rules to control plane functions to enforce them, and may also support a unified policy framework to govern network behavior.
  • the PCF 256 may also implement a front end to access subscription information relevant for policy decisions in a UDR of the UDM 258.
  • the PCF 256 exhibits an Npcf service-based interface.
  • the UDM 258 may handle subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions and may store the subscription data of LIE 202.
  • subscription data may be communicated via an N8 reference point between the UDM 258 and the AMF 244.
  • the UDM 258 may include two parts, an application front end, and a user data repository (UDR) (not illustrated in FIG. 2).
  • the UDR may store subscription data and policy data for the UDM 258 and the PCF 256, and/or structured data for exposure and application data (including PFDs for application detection, application request information for multiple UEs 202) for the NEF 252.
  • a Nudr service-based interface may be exhibited by the UDR to allow the UDM 258, PCF 256, and NEF 252 to access a particular set of the stored data, as well as to read, update (e.g., add, modify), delete, and subscribe to the notification of relevant data changes in the UDR.
  • the UDM may include a UDM-FE, which is in charge of processing credentials, location management, subscription management, and so on. Several different front ends may serve the same user in different transactions.
  • the UDM-FE accesses subscription information stored in the UDR and performs authentication credential processing, user identification handling, access authorization, registration/mobility management, and subscription management.
  • the UDM 258 may exhibit the Nudm service-based interface.
  • the AF 260 may provide application influence on traffic routing, provide access to NEF, and interact with the policy framework for policy control.
  • the 5GC 240 may enable edge computing by selecting operator/3rd party services to be geographically close to a point that the UE 202 is attached to the network. This may reduce latency and load on the network.
  • the 5GC 240 may select a UPF 248 close to the UE 202 and execute traffic steering from the UPF 248 to data network 236 via the N6 interface. This may be based on the UE subscription data, UE location, and information provided by the AF 260. In this way, the AF 260 may influence UPF (re)selection and traffic routing.
  • the network operator may permit AF 260 to interact directly with relevant NFs. Additionally, the AF 260 may exhibit a Naf service-based interface.
  • the data network 236 may represent various network operator sendees, Internet access, or third-party services that may be provided by one or more servers including, for example, application/ content server 238.
  • FIG. 3 schematically illustrates a wireless network 300 in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the wireless network 300 may include a UE 302 in wireless communication with AN 304.
  • the UE 302 and AN 304 may be similar to, and substantially interchangeable with, like-named components described elsewhere herein.
  • the UE 302 may be communicatively coupled with the AN 304 via connection 306.
  • the connection 306 is illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols such as an LTE protocol or a 5G NR protocol operating at mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies.
  • the UE 302 may include a host platform 308 coupled with a modem platform 310.
  • the host platform 308 may include application processing circuitry 312, which may be coupled with protocol processing circuitry 314 of the modem platform 310.
  • the application processing circuitry' 312 may run various applications for the UE 302 that source/sink application data.
  • the application processing circuitry 312 may further implement one or more layer operations to transmit/receive application data to/from a data network. These layer operations may include transport (for example UDP) and Internet (for example, IP) operations
  • the protocol processing circuitry 314 may implement one or more layer operations to facilitate transmission or reception of data over the connection 306.
  • the layer operations implemented by the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include, for example, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, and NAS operations.
  • the modem platform 310 may further include digital baseband circuitry 316 that may implement one or more layer operations that are “below” layer operations performed by the protocol processing circuitry 314 m a network protocol stack. These operations may include, for example, PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding, which may include one or more of space-time, space- frequency or spatial coding, reference signal generation/detection, preamble sequence generation and/or decoding, synchronization sequence generation/detection, control channel signal blind decoding, and other related functions.
  • PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding, which
  • the modem platform 310 may further include transmit circuitry' 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, and RF front end (RFFE) 324, which may include or connect to one or more antenna panels 326.
  • the transmit circuitry 318 may include a digital-to-analog converter, mixer, intermediate frequency (IF) components, etc.
  • the receive circuitry 320 may include an analog-to-digital converter, mixer, IF components, etc.
  • the RF circuitry 322 may include a low-noise amplifier, a power amplifier, power tracking components, etc.
  • RFFE 324 may include filters (for example, surface/bulk acoustic wave filters), switches, antenna tuners, beamforming components (for example, phase-array antenna components), etc.
  • transmit/receive components may be specific to details of a specific implementation such as, for example, whether the communication is TDM or I DM, in mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies, etc.
  • the transmit/receive components may be arranged in multiple parallel transmit/receive chains, may be disposed of in the same or different chips/modules, etc.
  • the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include one or more instances of control circuitry (not shown) to provide control functions for the transmit/receive components.
  • a UE reception may be established by and via the antenna panels 326, RFFE 324, RF circuitry 322, receive circuitry 320, digital baseband circuitry 316, and protocol processing circuitry 314.
  • the antenna panels 326 may receive a transmission from the AN 304 by receive- beamforming signals received by a plurality of antennas/ antenna elements of the one or more antenna panels 326.
  • a UE transmission may be established by and via the protocol processing circuitry 314, digital baseband circuitry 316, transmit circuitry 318, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326.
  • the transmit components of the UE 302 may apply a spatial filter to the data to be transmitted to form a transmit beam emitted by the antenna elements of the antenna panels 326.
  • the AN 304 may include a host platform 328 coupled with a modem platform 330.
  • the host platform 328 may include application processing circuitry 332 coupled with protocol processing circuitry 334 of the modem platform 330.
  • the modem platform may further include digital baseband circuitry 336, transmit circuitry 338, receive circuitry 340, RF circuitry 342, RFFE circuitry 344, and antenna panels 346.
  • the components of the AN 304 may be similar to and substantially interchangeable with like-named components of the UE 302.
  • the components of the AN 304 may perform various logical functions that include, for example, RNC functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating components, according to some example embodiments, able to read instructions from a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (e.g., a non-transitory machine-readable storage medium) and perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein.
  • FIG. 4 shows a diagrammatic representation of hardware resources 400 including one or more processors (or processor cores) 410, one or more memory, ''storage devices 420, and one or more communication resources 430, each of which may be communicatively coupled via a bus 440 or other interface circuitry.
  • the processors 410 may include, for example, a processor 412 and a processor 414.
  • the processors 410 may be, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), a reduced instruction set computing (RISC) processor, a complex instruction set computing (CISC) processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), a DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • RISC reduced instruction set computing
  • CISC complex instruction set computing
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
  • the memory/storage devices 420 may include a main memory, disk storage, or any suitable combination thereof.
  • the memory/storage devices 420 may include but are not limited to, any type of volatile, non-volatile, or semi-volatile memory such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM ), static random access memory (SRAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), Flash memory, solid-state storage, etc.
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • Flash memory solid-state storage, etc.
  • the communication resources 430 may include interconnection or network interface controllers, components, or other suitable devices to communicate with one or more peripheral devices 404 or one or more databases 406 or other network elements via a network 408.
  • the communication resources 430 may include wired communication components (e.g., for coupling via USB, Ethernet, etc.), cellular communication components, NFC components, Bluetooth® (or Bluetooth® Low Energy) components, Wi- Fi® components, and other communication components.
  • Instructions 450 may comprise software, a program, an application, an applet, an app, or other executable code for causing at least any of the processors 410 to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein.
  • the instructions 450 may reside, completely or partially, within at least one of the processors 410 (e.g., within the processor's cache memory), the memory/storage devices 420, or any suitable combination thereof.
  • any portion of the instructions 450 may be transferred to the hardware resources 400 from any combination of the peripheral devices 404 or the databases 406.
  • the memory of processors 410, the memory/storage devices 420, the peripheral devices 404, and the databases 406 are examples of computer-readable and machine-readable media.
  • At least one of the components outlined in one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to perform one or more operations, techniques, processes, and/or methods as outlined in the example sections below.
  • baseband circuitry associated with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below.
  • circuitry associated with a UE, base station, satellite, network element, etc. as described above in connection with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below in the example section.
  • AI/ML application may refer to a complete and deployable package, environment to achieve a certain function in an operational environment.
  • AI/ML application or the like may be an application that contains some artificial intelligence (AI)/machine learning (ML) models and application -level descriptions.
  • AI/ML application may be used for configuring or implementing one or more of the disclosed aspects.
  • machine learning refers to the use of computer systems implementing algorithms and/or statistical models to perform a specific task(s) without using explicit instructions but instead relying on patterns and inferences.
  • ML algorithms build or estimate mathematical model(s) (referred to as “ML models” or the like) based on sample data (referred to as “training data,” “model training information,” or the like) to make predictions or decisions without being explicitly programmed to perform such tasks.
  • an ML algorithm is a computer program that learns from experience with respect to some task and some performance measure
  • an ML model may be any object or data structure created after an ML algorithm is trained with one or more training datasets. After training, an ML model may be used to make predictions on new datasets.
  • ML algorithm refers to different concepts than the term “ML model,” these terms as discussed herein may be used interchangeably for the present disclosure.
  • machine learning model may also refer to ML methods and concepts used by an ML-assisted solution.
  • An “ML-assisted solution” is a solution that addresses a specific use case using ML algorithms during operation.
  • ML models include supervised learning (e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.) unsupervised learning (e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.), reinforcement learning (e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit learning, deep RL, etc.), neural networks, and the like.
  • supervised learning e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.
  • unsupervised learning e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.
  • reinforcement learning e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit
  • An “ML pipeline” is a set of functionalities, functions, or functional entities specific for an ML-assisted solution, an ML. pipeline may include one or several data sources in a data pipeline, a model training pipeline, a model evaluation pipeline, and an actor.
  • the “actor” is an entity that hosts an ML-assisted solution using the output of the ML model inference).
  • ML training host refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the training of the model.
  • ML inference host refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the model during inference mode (which includes both the model execution as well as any online learning if applicable).
  • the ML-host informs the actor about the output of the ML algorithm, and the actor decides for an action (an “action” is performed by an actor as a result of the output of an ML-assisted solution).
  • model inference information refers to information used as an input to the ML model for determining inference(s); the data used to train an ML model and the data used to determine inferences may overlap, however, “training data” and “inference data” refer to different concepts.
  • the disclosed techniques introduce TPC for a distributed unit (DU) command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes: [00103] (a) UL TPC for DU: UL TPC command from an IAB mobile termination (MT) to a parent DU to indicate parent DU's DL TX power adjustment; and
  • TPC for DU DL. TPC command from a parent DU to an
  • the received signal at an LAB DU may have interference coming from a co-located MT's DL reception (parent DU's DL transmission).
  • DL power control schemes in current IAB specifications for an IAB MT or a UE to inform its parent to adjust its DL power control.
  • Only UL power control schemes exist including DL transmit power control (TPC) command from parent DU to an IAB MT or a UE to adjust its UL transmission power.
  • TPC transmit power control
  • a UL TPC command for the DU to indicate to parent DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a UL TPC for DU command.
  • the received signal at the parent DU may have interference coming from the DU's DL transmission.
  • a parent DU can send dynamic DL transmit power control (TPC) command for the MT to increase its UL transmission power.
  • TPC transmit power control
  • the UL transmission power is limited by the MT's capability and may not fully resolve this issue.
  • DL TPC command for DU from parent DU to an IAB MT to indicate the co-located IAB DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a DL. TPC for DU command.
  • an IAB node can connect to its parent node (an IAB donor or another IAB node) through a parent backhaul (BH) link, connect to a child user equipment (UE) through a child access (AC) link, and connect to a child IAB node through a child BH link.
  • parent node an IAB donor or another IAB node
  • UE child user equipment
  • AC child access
  • FIG. 5 show's a reference diagram for IAB in a standalone mode, which contains one IAB donor node 503 and multiple IAB nodes (e.g., 514, 516, 518, 522, and 524).
  • the IAB architecture 500 can include a core network (CN) 502 coupled to an IAB donor node 503.
  • the IAB donor node 503 can include control unit control plane (CU-CP) function 504, control unit user plane (CU-UP) function 506, other functions 508, and distributed unit (DU) functions 510 and 512.
  • the DU function 510 can be coupled via wireless backhaul links to IAB nodes 514 and 516.
  • the DU function 512 is coupled via a wireless backhaul link to TAB node 518.
  • TAB node 514 is coupled to a UE 520 via a wireless access link
  • IAB node 516 is coupled to IAB nodes 522 and 524.
  • the IAB node 522 is coupled to UE 528 via a wireless access link.
  • the IAB node 518 is coupled to UE 526 via a wireless access link.
  • Each of the IAB nodes illustrated in FIG. 5 can include a mobile termination (MT) function and a DU function.
  • the MI' function can be defined as a component of the mobile equipment and can be referred to as a function residing on an IAB node that terminates the radio interface layers of the backhaul Uu interface toward the IAB donor or other IAB nodes.
  • the IAB donor 503 is treated as a single logical node that comprises a set of functions such as gNB-DU, gNB-CU-CP 504, gNB-CU-UP 506, and potentially other functions 508.
  • the IAB donor 503 can be split according to these functions, which can all be either collocated or non- collocated as allowed by 3GPP NG-RAN architecture. JAB-related aspects may arise when such a split is exercised.
  • some of the functions presently associated with the IAB donor may eventually be moved outside of the donor in case it becomes evident that they do not perform lAB-specific tasks.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU)-distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an LAB architecture 600, in accordance with some aspects.
  • the IAB architecture 600 includes an IAB donor 601, a parent IAB node 603, an IAB node 605, a child IAB node 607, and a child UE 609.
  • the IAB donor 601 includes a CU function 602 and a DU function 604.
  • the parent IAB node 603 includes a parent MT (P-MT) function 606 and a parent DU (P-DU) function 608.
  • the IAB node 605 includes an MT function 610 and a DU function 612.
  • the child IAB node 607 includes a child MT (C- MT) function 614 and a child DU (C-DU) function 616.
  • RRC signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the MT functions 606, 610, and 614, as well as between the CU function 602 and the child UE (C-UE) 609. Additionally, Fl access protocol (F1AP) signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the DU functions of the parent LAB node 603 and the IAB node 605.
  • F1AP Fl access protocol
  • multiple IAB nodes are connected to a donor node (DN) via a wireless backhaul.
  • a DN or a parent LAB node needs to properly allocate resources for its child IAB node under the half-duplex constraint at the child IAB node.
  • the time-frequency resource allocated to the parent link may be orthogonal to the time-frequency resource allocated to the child or access link.
  • each IAB node holds a DU and an MT function.
  • the LAB node Via the MI' function, the LAB node connects to its parent LAB node or the lAB-donor like a UE.
  • the IAB node Via the DU function, the IAB node communicates with its child UEs and child MTs like a base station.
  • RRC signaling is used between the CU in the LAB donor and the UE/MT
  • Fl AP signaling is used between the CU and the DU in an IAB node.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates an example of the IAB CU/DU split architecture and signaling
  • w'here MT and DU in a parent LAB node are indicated as P-MT/P- DU
  • MT and DU in a child IAB node are indicated as C-MT/C-DU
  • a child UE is indicated as C-UE.
  • a TDM -based DU function and an MT function may be supported within an IAB node.
  • Extended IAB functionalities include duplexing enhancements to increase spectral efficiency and reduce latency through the support of SDM/FDM-based resource management, through simultaneous transmissions, and/or reception on lAB-nodes.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios 700, in accordance with some aspects.
  • simultaneous operation (transmission and/or reception) of lAB-node's child and parent links includes four cases as below (illustrated in FIG. 7):
  • DL power control (MT informs its parent DU to adjust its DL transmission power) is needed for IAB backhaul.
  • the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset (different Cases associated with an IAB network are listed below).
  • the disclosed techniques include two TA mechanisms to support simultaneous operations:
  • Mechanism 1 Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced; and [00126] Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case#l TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
  • Case #4 within an lAB-node, when transmitting using case 2 while when receiving using case 3;
  • Case #5 Case #1 for access link timing and Case 4 for backhaul link timing within an lAB-node in different time slots;
  • the UL transmission timing of an lAB-node can be aligned with the JAB-node's DL transmission timing.
  • the UL reception timing of an l AB-node can be aligned with the lAB-node's DL reception timing;
  • Case #1 is supported for both access and backhaul link transmission timing alignment and applied to Rel-16 LAB.
  • Case #2 - Case #5 are not supported for IAB.
  • the disclosed techniques may be based on the following timing alignment considerations: [00143] (a) Case #7 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #2 (simultaneous MT-Rx/DU-Rx).
  • Case #6 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #1 (simultaneous MT-Tx/DU-Tx).
  • Case #7 timing is supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #4 (simultaneous MT- Tx/DU-Rx).
  • Timing relationships for different simultaneous operations are discussed herein.
  • MT-RXZDU-TX since parent DU TX timing and DU TX timing cannot be changed, the timing relationship follows current Case #1 timing and is not discussed.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates diagram 800 of parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • MT parent IAB node mobile termination
  • DU parent IAB node distributed unit
  • FIG. 8 there is illustrated the timing relationship with Case #7 timing for simultaneous parent-MT RX/parent-DU RX operation at a parent LAB node.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a diagram 900 of TA case1 /T p /T g relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
  • the parent-MT RX timing at the parent IAB node is related to parent-MT receiving propagation delay T p0 .
  • the IAB-MT has timing advance control (original Case #1 timing) of TA with IAB-MT receiving propagation delay T p .
  • the following definitions may be used: [00151] (a) TA case1 : The original Case#1 TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #1 timing mode;
  • the TA offset,Case7 value can be derived with the following steps: [00158] (a) IAB-MT RX timing is T p behind DL TX timing. IAB-MT TX
  • Case #1 timing is TA Case1 ahead of IAB-MT RX timing.
  • IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TA Case1 -T v ahead of DL TX timing.
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T A Case1 -2T p ahead of DL TX timing.
  • Parent-MT RX timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing.
  • DU RX Case #7 timing is the same as parent-MT RX timing.
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing.
  • TX timing (from Step a).
  • Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing (from Step b).
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T A Case1 -2T p +T p0 ahead of Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing.
  • ⁇ IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TA Case1 -2T p +T p0 ahead of IAB-MT TX Case#7 timing.
  • TA offset,Case7 TA Case1 -27 p +T p0 .
  • TA case1 2T p + T q (as illustrated in FIG.. 9).
  • ⁇ TA offset,Case7 TA case1 -2T p + T p0 (from Step c).
  • ⁇ TA offset,Case7 T p0 + T g .
  • the Case #7 TA in Equation (2) may be negative, which is one issue that, is addressed by the present techniques for Case #7 timing.
  • the LAB node with Case #7 timing may also need to address the issue of different parent-DU RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to Case #7 timing and legacy IAB nodes and UEs which are still in Case #1 timing.
  • the disclosed techniques address another issue to enable Case #7 timing at a parent TAB node, namely, when an lAB-MT's TA is changed from Case #1 TA to Case #7 TA, it will cause an issue for the IAB- node to decide its DL TX timing. Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX with Case #6 Timing
  • FIG. 10 illustrates diagram 1000 of Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 10 illustrates the timing relationship with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX operation.
  • LAB MT TX timing original Case #1 timing
  • the MT's TX timing may be shifted to align with the DU's TX timing.
  • the shifting offset from Case #1 timing to Case #6 timing can be easily calculated as
  • Case #6 TA when Case #6 TA is transmitted instead of Case #1 TA, the LAB node may not calculate its DL TX timing based on the Case #6 TA.
  • the parent IAB node needs to address the issue of different parent DLT RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to the new' Case #6 timing and legacy IAB nodes which are still in Case #1 timing.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a diagram 1100 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a diagram 1200 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 illustrate trvo possible timing relationships with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX operation at an IAB node, either by shifting its child IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 11) or by shifting the IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 12). The shifting offset and the new TA for child MT in FIG. 11 are (Note that.
  • TA offsets for the two possible timing relationships may be positive or negative, but the new TAs are positive.
  • (A) Mechanism 1 Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
  • the following two procedures may be configured: one to modify the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new TA range for simultaneous operation, and another one to introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing.
  • Procedure 1 Modify current TA transmission scheme to accommodate new TA range for simultaneous operations.
  • TA MT T p0 + T g .
  • Option I modify TA command in medium access control random access response (MAC RAR).
  • MAC RAR medium access control random access response
  • N TA + N TA,offset • T c (e.g., TS38.211-4.3.1), where the value of (note that this is a fixed offset and not the offset discussed in this disclosure) depends on the duplex mode of the cell in which the uplink transmission takes place and the frequency range (FR) and is defined in TS38.133 Table 7.1.2-2.
  • the TA range may be changed, to accommodate possibly negative TA for MT-RXZDU-RX.
  • One option is to pre-define a minimum T A min value, which can be negative and transmit positive T A, sim in TA command in MAC RAR.
  • the new TA (T TA, sim ) may be determined as follows:
  • MAC RAR 0,1,2, ... ,7692 is communicated in MAC RAR, which needs to extend the current 12 bits TA command field in MAC ICAR to 13 bits.
  • Option 2 modify the TA command in MAC CE.
  • the TA can be further modified in the TA command in the MAC CE.
  • T A max is a pre-defined value and transmit positive T A,sim in TA command MAC CE.
  • Option 1 and Option 2 can be applied independently and jointly .
  • Case #1 TA ( TA case#1 ) defined in the current specification can be re-used and always transmitted, which means the current TA command RAR and TA command MAC CE may not be modified.
  • the IAB MI' can calculate the new TA for MT TX timing as TA new — TA case#1 --- TA sim,offset .
  • Option 1 introduce new field in MAC RAR
  • Option 2 introduce new field in existing TA command MAC
  • Option 3 introduce a new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE.
  • T sim,offset,min the value may be pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit positive T sim,offset in the timing offset Command.
  • the TA offset may be defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TA case#1 ) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
  • the TA offset can also be defined as TA new minus TA Case#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar:
  • the LAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset.
  • mechanism 1 may be used, which includes transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations; and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
  • procedure 1 includes modifying the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new I' A range for simultaneous operations.
  • Option 1 includes modifying the TA command in MAC RAR (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
  • Option 2 includes modifying the TA command in MAC CE (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
  • Procedure 2 includes introducing additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
  • Mechanism 2 includes always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset (e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above) transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
  • additional TA offset e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above
  • the following signaling options may be used: Option 1 (introduce new field in MAC RAR), Option 2 (introduce new field in existing TA command MAC CE), and Option 3 (introduce new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE).
  • T sim,offset,min (T sim,offset,min + T sim,offset ) • 16 •64/2 ⁇ .
  • the TA offset is defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TA case#1 ) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects and to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
  • the communication device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other communication devices.
  • Circuitry e.g., processing circuitry'
  • circuitry is a collection of circuits implemented in tangible entities of the devi ce 1300 that include hardware (e.g., simple circuits, gates, logic, etc.). Circuitry membership may be flexible over time. Circuitries include members that may, alone or in combination, perform specified operations when operating. In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may be immutably designed to carry' out a specific operation (e.g., hardwired).
  • the hardware of the circuitry may include variably connected physical components (e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.) including a machine-readable medium physically modified (e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.) to encode instructions of the specific operation.
  • variably connected physical components e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.
  • machine-readable medium e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.
  • the underlying electrical properties of a hardware constituent are changed, for example, from an insulator to a conductor or vice versa.
  • the instructions enable embedded hardware (e.g., the execution units or a loading mechanism) to create members of the circuitry' in hardware via the variable connections to carry out portions of the specific operation when in operation.
  • the machine-readable medium elements are part of the circuitry or are communicatively coupled to the other components of the circuitry when the device is operating.
  • any of the physical components may be used in more than one member of more than one circuitry.
  • execution units may be used in a first circuit of a first circuitry at one point in time and reused by a second circuit in the first circuitry, or by a third circuit in a second circuitry at a different time. Additional examples of these components with respect to the device 1300 follow.
  • the device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other devices.
  • the communication device 1300 may operate in the capacity of a server communication device, a client communication device, or both in server- client network environments.
  • the communication device 1300 may act as a peer communication device in a peer-to-peer (P2P) (or other distributed) network environment.
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • the communication device 1300 may be a UE, eNB, PC, a tablet PC, an STB, a PDA, a mobile telephone, a smartphone, a web appliance, a network router, switch or bridge, or any communication device capable of executing instructions (sequential or otherwise) that specify actions to be taken by that communication device.
  • the term "communication device” shall also be taken to include any collection of communication devices that individually or jointly execute a set (or multiple sets) of instructions to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein, such as cloud computing, software as a service (SaaS), and other computer cluster configurations.
  • Examples, as described herein, may include, or may operate on, logic or a number of components, modules, or mechanisms.
  • Modules are tangible entities (e.g., hardware) capable of performing specified operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner.
  • circuits may be arranged (e.g., internally or with respect to external entities such as other circuits) in a specified manner as a module.
  • the whole or part of one or more computer systems e.g., a standalone, client, or server computer system
  • one or more hardware processors may be configured by firmware or software (e.g., instructions, an application portion, or an application) as a module that operates to perform specified operations.
  • the software may reside on a communication device-readable medium.
  • the software when executed by the underlying hardware of the module, causes the hardware to perform the specified operations.
  • module is understood to encompass a tangible entity, be that an entity that is physically constructed, specifically configured (e.g., hardwired), or temporarily (e.g., transitorily) configured (e.g., programmed) to operate in a specified manner or to perform part or all of any operation described herein.
  • each of the modules need not be instantiated at any one moment in time.
  • the modules comprise a general-purpose hardware processor configured using the software
  • the general-purpose hardware processor may be configured as respective different modules at different times.
  • the software may accordingly configure a hardware processor, for example, to constitute a particular module at one instance of time and to constitute a different module at a different instance of time.
  • the communication device e.g., UE 1300 may include a hardware processor 1302 (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a hardware processor core, or any combination thereof), a main memory 1304, a static memory 1306, and a storage device 1307 (e.g., hard drive, tape drive, flash storage, or other block or storage devices), some or all of which may communicate with each other via an interlink (e.g., bus) 1308.
  • the communication device 1300 may further include a display device 1310, an alphanumeric input device 1312 (e.g., a keyboard), and a user interface (UI) navigation device 1314 (e.g., a mouse).
  • UI user interface
  • the display device 1310, input device 1312, and UI navigation device 1314 may be a touchscreen display.
  • the communication device 1300 may additionally include a signal generation device 1318 (e.g., a speaker), a network interface device 1320, and one or more sensors 1321, such as a global positioning system (GPS) sensor, compass, accelerometer, or another sensor.
  • the communication device 1300 may include an output controller 1328, such as a serial (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card reader, etc.).
  • a serial e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card
  • the storage device 1307 may include a communication device- readable medium 1322, on which is stored one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324 (e.g,, software) embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein.
  • registers of the processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory 1306, and/or the storage device 1307 may be, or include (completely or at least partially), the device-readable medium 1322, on which is stored the one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324, embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein.
  • one or any combination of the hardware processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory' 1306, or the mass storage 1316 may constitute the device-readable medium 1322.
  • the term "device-readable medium” is interchangeable with “computer-readable medium” or “machine-readable medium”. While the communication device-readable medium 1322 is illustrated as a single medium, the term “communication device-readable medium” may include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, and/or associated caches and servers) configured to store the one or more instructions 1324.
  • communication device-readable medium is inclusive of the terms “machine-readable medium” or “computer-readable medium”, and may include any medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions (e.g., instructions 1324) for execution by the communication device 1300 and that causes the communication device 1300 to perform any one or more of the techniques of the present disclosure, or that is capable of storing, encoding or carrying data structures used by or associated with such instructions.
  • Non-limiting communication device-readable medium examples may include solid-state memories and optical and magnetic media.
  • communication device-readable media may include non- volatile memory, such as semiconductor memory devices (e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and flash memory'- devices; magnetic disks, such as internal hard disks and removable disks; magneto- optical disks; Random Access Memory (RAM), and CD-ROM and DVD-ROM disks.
  • semiconductor memory devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrical
  • Instructions 1324 may further be transmitted or received over a communications network 1326 using a transmission medium via the network interface device 1320 utilizing any one of a number of transfer protocols.
  • the network interface device 1320 may include one or more physical jacks (e.g., Ethernet, coaxial, or phonejacks) or one or more antennas to connect to the communications network 1326.
  • the network interface device 1320 may include a plurality of antennas to wirelessly communicate using at least one of single-input-multiple-output (SIMO), MIMO, or multiple- input-single-output (MISO) techniques.
  • SIMO single-input-multiple-output
  • MIMO multiple-input-multiple-output
  • MISO multiple- input-single-output
  • the network interface device 1320 may wirelessly communicate using Multiple User MIMO techniques.
  • transmission medium shall be taken to include any intangible medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions for execution by the communication device 1300, and includes digital or analog communications signals or another intangible medium to facilitate communication of such software.
  • a transmission medium in the context of this disclosure is a device-readable medium.
  • machine-readable medium means the same thing and may be used interchangeably in this disclosure.
  • the terms are defined to include both machine-storage media and transmission media.
  • the terms include both storage devices/media and carrier waves/modulated data signals.
  • Described implementations of the subject matter can include one or more features, alone or in combination as illustrated below by w'ay of examples.
  • Example 1 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of di stributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and a Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU tunction of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
  • TA timing advance
  • Example 2 the subject matter of Example 1 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 3 the subject matter of Example 2 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 4 the subject matter of Example 3 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 5 the subject matter of Examples 3-4 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 6 the subject matter of Examples 1-5 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
  • Example 7 the subject matter of Example 6 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (M AC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • M AC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 8 the subject matter of Examples 6-7 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 9 the subject matter of Examples 1-8 includes, transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry; and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry.
  • Example 10 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (TAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent IAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
  • TA timing advance
  • Example 11 the subject matter of Example 10 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 12 the subject matter of Example 11 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 13 is a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of the distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network and to cause the parent IAB node to determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value.
  • IAB Integrated Access and Backhaul
  • Example 14 the subject matter of Example 13 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the TA value is a TA offset
  • the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 15 the subject matter of Example 14 includes, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 16 the subject matter of Example 15 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 17 the subject matter of Examples 15-16 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 18 the subject matter of Examples 13-17 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
  • Example 19 the subject matter of Example 18 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 20 the subject matter of Examples 18-19 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 21 is at least one machine-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, cause the processing circuitry to perform operations to implement any of Examples 1-20, [00261]
  • Example 22 is an apparatus comprising means to implement any of Examples 1-20.
  • Example 23 is a system to implement any of Examples 1 -20.
  • Example 24 is a method to implement any of Examples 1-20.
  • TIMING ADVANCE CONFIGURATIONS FOR LAB NETWORKS
  • aspects pertain to wireless communications. Some aspects relate to wireless networks including 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) networks, 3GPP LTE (Long Term Evolution) networks, 3GPP LTE-A (LTE Advanced) networks, (MulteFire, LTE-U), and fifth-generation (5G) networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc.
  • 5G networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc.
  • TA timing advance
  • 5G-NR networks will continue to evolve based on 3GPP LTE- Advanced with additional potential new radio access technologies (RATs) to enrich people's lives with seamless wireless connectivity solutions delivering fast, rich content and services.
  • RATs new radio access technologies
  • mmWave millimeter wave
  • LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum includes (and is not limited to) the LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum via dual connectivity (DC), or DC-based LAA, and the standalone LTE system in the unlicensed spectrum, according to which LTE-based technology solely operates in the unlicensed spectrum without requiring an “anchor” in the licensed spectrum, called MulteFire.
  • Further enhanced operation of LTE and NR systems in the licensed, as well as unlicensed spectrum, is expected in future releases and 5G systems.
  • Such enhanced operations can include techniques for supporting TA configurations in IAB networks.
  • FIG. 1 A illustrates an architecture of a network, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. IB and FIG. 1C illustrate a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a reference diagram of an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU) - distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates IAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios, in accordance with some aspects.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • MT parent IAB node mobile termination
  • DU parent IAB node distributed unit
  • FIG. 9 illustrates TA case1 /T p /T g relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects.
  • eNB evolved Node-B
  • gNB new generation Node-B
  • AP access point
  • STA wireless station
  • MS mobile station
  • UE user equipment
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an architecture of a network in accordance with some aspects.
  • the network 140A is shown to include user equipment (UE)
  • UE user equipment
  • the UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • PDAs Personal Data Assistants
  • the UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • PDAs Personal Data Assistants
  • pagers pagers
  • laptop computers desktop computers
  • wireless handsets wireless handsets
  • drones or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface.
  • UE 101 can be collectively referred to herein as UE 101, and UE 101 can be used to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
  • Any of the radio links described herein may operate according to any exemplary radio communication technology and/or standard.
  • LTE and LTE- Advanced are standards for wireless communications of high-speed data for UE such as mobile telephones.
  • carrier aggregation is a technology- according to which multiple carrier signals operating on different frequencies may be used to cany communications for a single UE, thus increasing the bandwidth available to a single device.
  • carrier aggregation may- be used where one or more component carriers operate on unlicensed frequencies.
  • aspects described herein can be used in the context of any spectrum management scheme including, for example, dedicated licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, (licensed) shared spectrum (such as Licensed Shared Access (LSA) in 2.3-2.4 GHz, 3.4-3.6 GHz, 3.6-3.8 GHz, and further frequencies and Spectrum Access System (SAS) m 3.55-3.7 GHz and further frequencies).
  • LSA Licensed Shared Access
  • SAS Spectrum Access System
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can comprise an Internet-of-Things (lo l ) UE or a Cellular loT (CIoT) UE, which can comprise a network access layer designed for low-power loT applications utilizing short- lived UE connections.
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include a narrowband (NB) loT UE (e.g., such as an enhanced NB-IoT (eNB-IoT) UE and Further Enhanced (FeNB-loT) UE).
  • NB narrowband
  • eNB-IoT enhanced NB-IoT
  • FeNB-loT Further Enhanced
  • An loT UE can utilize technologies such as machine-to-machine (M2M) or machine-type communications (MTC) for exchanging data with an MTC server or device via a public land mobile network (PLMN), Proximity-Based Service (ProSe), or device-to-device (D2D) communication, sensor networks, or loT networks.
  • M2M or MTC exchange of data may be a machine-initiated exchange of data.
  • An loT network includes interconnecting loT UEs, which may include uniquely identifiable embedded computing devices (within the Internet infrastructure), with short-lived connections.
  • the loT UEs may execute background applications (e.g., keep- alive messages, status updates, etc.) to facilitate the connections of the loT network.
  • any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include enhanced MTC (eMTC) UEs or further enhanced MTC (FeMTC) UEs.
  • the UEs 101 and 102 may be configured to connect, e.g., communicatively couple, with a radio access network (RAN) 110.
  • the RAN 110 may be, for example, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), a NextGen RAN (NG RAN), or some other type of RAN.
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • NG RAN NextGen RAN
  • the UEs 101 and 102 utilize connections 103 and 104, respectively, each of which comprises a physical communications interface or layer (discussed in further detail below); in this example, the connections 103 and 104 are illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols, such as a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) protocol, a code-division multiple access (CDMA) network protocol, a Push-to-Talk (PTT) protocol, a PTT over Cellular (POC) protocol, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) protocol, a 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) protocol, a fifth-generation (5G) protocol, a New Radio (NR) protocol, and the like.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • CDMA code-division multiple access
  • PTT Push-to-Talk
  • POC PTT over Cellular
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • NR New Radio
  • the UEs 101 and 102 may further directly exchange communication data via a ProSe interface 105.
  • the ProSe interface 105 may alternatively be referred to as a sidelink interface comprising one or more logical channels, including but not limited to a Physical Sidelink Control Channel (PSCCH), a Physical Sidelink Shared Channel (PSSCH), a Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel (PSDCH), and a Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel (PSBCH).
  • PSCCH Physical Sidelink Control Channel
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • PSDCH Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the UE 102 is shown to be configured to access an access point (AP) 106 via connection 107.
  • the connection 107 can comprise a local wireless connection, such as, for example, a connection consistent with any IEEE 802.11 protocol, according to which the AP 106 can comprise a wireless fidelity (WiFi®) router.
  • WiFi® wireless fidelity
  • the AP 106 is shown to be connected to the Internet without connecting to the core network of the wireless system (described in further detail below).
  • the RAN 110 can include one or more access nodes that, enable connections 103 and 104.
  • These access nodes can be referred to as base stations (BSs), NodeBs, evolved NodeBs (eNBs), Next Generation NodeBs (gNBs), RAN network nodes, and the like, and can comprise ground stations (e.g., terrestrial access points) or satellite stations providing coverage within a geographic area (e.g., a cell).
  • the communication nodes 111 and 112 can be transmission/reception points (TRPs).
  • the RAN 110 may include one or more RAN nodes for providing macrocells, e.g., macro RAN node 111, and one or more RAN nodes for providing femtocells or picocells (e.g., cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells), e.g., low power (LP) RAN node 112 or an unlicensed spectrum based secondary RAN node 112.
  • LP low power
  • any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can terminate the air interface protocol and can be the first point of contact for the UEs 101 and 102.
  • any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can fulfill various logical functions for the RAN 110 including, but not limited to, radio network controller (RNC) functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling, and mobility management.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • any of the nodes 111 and/or 112 can be a new generation Node-B (gNB), an evolved node-B (eNB), or another type of RAN node.
  • gNB Node-B
  • eNB evolved node-B
  • the RAN 110 is shown to be communicatively coupled to a core network (CN) 120 via an SI interface 113.
  • the CN 120 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) network, a NextGen Packet Core (NPC) network, or some other type of CN (e.g., as illustrated in reference to FIGS. 1B-1C).
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • NPC NextGen Packet Core
  • the SI interface 113 is split into two parts: the Sl-U interface 114, which carries user traffic data between the R AN nodes 111 and 112 and the serving gateway (S-GW) 122, and the SI -mobility management entity (MME) interface 115, which is a signaling interface between the RAN nodes 111 and 112 and MM I is 121.
  • S-GW serving gateway
  • MME SI -mobility management entity
  • the CN 120 comprises the MMEs 121, the S-GW 122, the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (P-GW) 123, and a home subscriber server (HSS) 124.
  • the MMEs 121 may be similar in function to the control plane of legacy Serving General Packet Radio Sendee (GPRS) Support Nodes (SGSN).
  • the MMEs 121 may manage mobility aspects in access such as gateway selection and tracking area list management.
  • the HSS 124 may comprise a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions.
  • the CN 120 may comprise one or several HSSs 124, depending on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment, on the organization of the network, etc.
  • the HSS 124 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/ addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc.
  • the S-GW 122 may termmate the SI interface 113 towards the RAN 110, and route data packets between the RAN 110 and the CN 120.
  • the S-GW 122 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities of the S-GW 122 may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
  • the P-GW 123 may terminate an SGi interface toward a PDN.
  • the P-GW 123 may route data packets between the EPC network 120 and external networks such as a network including the application server 184 (alternatively referred to as application function (AT)) via an Internet Protocol (IP) interface 125.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the P-GW 123 can also communicate data to other external networks 131 A, which can include the Internet, IP multimedia subsystem (IPS) network, and other networks.
  • the application server 184 may be an element offering applications that use IP bearer resources with the core network (e.g., UMTS Packet Services (PS) domain, LTE PS data services, etc.).
  • PS UMTS Packet Services
  • the P-GW 123 is shown to be communicatively coupled to an application server 184 via an IP interface 125.
  • the application server 184 can also be configured to support one or more communication services (e.g., Voice-over- Internet Protocol (VoIP) sessions, PTT sessions, group communication sessions, social networking services, etc.) for the UEs 101 and 102 via the CN 120.
  • VoIP Voice-over- Internet Protocol
  • the P-GW 123 may further be a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection.
  • Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) 126 is the policy and charging control element of the CN 120.
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • HPLMN Home Public Land Mobile Network
  • IP-CAN Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network
  • the PCRF 126 may be communicatively coupled to the application server 184 via the P-GW 123.
  • the communication network 140A can be an loT network or a 5G network, including a 5G new radio network using communications in the licensed (5G NR) and the unlicensed (5G NR-U) spectrum.
  • NB-IoT narrowband-IoT
  • An NG system architecture can include the RAN 110 and a 5G network core (5GC ) 120.
  • the NG-RAN 110 can include a plurality of nodes, such as gNBs and NG-eNBs.
  • the core network 120 e.g., a 5G core network or 5GC
  • AMF access and mobility function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the AMF and the UPF can be communicatively coupled to the gNBs and the NG-eNBs via NG interfaces. More specifically, in some aspects, the gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be connected to the AMF by NG-C interfaces, and to the UPF by NG-U interfaces. The gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be coupled to each other via Xn interfaces.
  • the NG system architecture can use reference points between various nodes as provided by 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 23.501 (e.g., V15.4.0, 2018-12).
  • TS 3GPP Technical Specification
  • each of the gNBs and the NG- eNBs can be implemented as a base station, a mobile edge server, a small cell, a home eNB, a RAN network node, and so forth.
  • a gNB can be a master node (MN) and NG-eNB can be a secondary node (SN) in a 5G architecture.
  • the master/primary node may operate in a licensed band and the secondary node may operate in an unlicensed band.
  • FIG. IB illustrates a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
  • a 5G system architecture 140B in a reference point representation. More specifically, UE 102 can be in communication with ILAN 110 as well as one or more other 5G core (5GC) network entities.
  • 5GC 5G core
  • the 5G system architecture 140B includes a plurality of network functions (NFs), such as access and mobility management function (AMF) 132, location management function (LMF) 133, session management function (SMF) 136, policy control function (PCF) 148, application function (AF) 150, user plane function (UPF) 134, network slice selection function (NSSF) 142, authentication server function (AUSF) 144, and unified data management (UDM)/home subscriber server (HSS) 146.
  • the UPF 134 can provide a connection to a data network (DN) 152, which can include, for example, operator services, Internet access, or third-party services.
  • DN data network
  • the AMF 132 can be used to manage access control and mobility and can also include network slice selection functionality.
  • the SMF 136 can be configured to set up and manage various sessions according to network policy.
  • the UPF 134 can be deployed in one or more configurations according to the desired service type.
  • the PCF 148 can be configured to provide a policy framework using network slicing, mobility management, and roaming (similar to PCRF in a 4G communication system).
  • the UDM can be configured to store subscriber profiles and data (similar to an HSS in a 4G communication system).
  • the LMF 133 may be used in connection with 5G positioning functionalities.
  • LMF 133 receives measurements and assistance information from the next generation radio access network (NG- RAN) 110 and the mobile device (e.g., UE 101) via the AMF 132 over the NLs interface to compute the position of the UE 101.
  • NG-RAN next generation radio access network
  • NRPPa NR positioning protocol A
  • NCPa next generation control plane interface
  • LMF 133 configures the UE using the LTE positioning protocol (LPP) via AMF 132.
  • the NG RAN 110 configures the UE 101 using radio resource control (RRC) protocol over LTE-Uu and NR-Uu interfaces.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the 5G system architecture 140B configures different reference signals to enable positioning measurements.
  • Example reference signals that mav be used for positioning measurements include the positioning reference signal (NR PRS) in the downlink and the sounding reference signal (SRS) for positioning in the uplink.
  • the downlink positioning reference signal (PRS) is a reference signal configured to support downlink- based positioning methods.
  • the 5G system architecture 140B includes an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) 168B as wel l as a plurality of IP multimedia core network subsystem entities, such as call session control functions (CSCFs).
  • IMS IP multimedia subsystem
  • CSCFs call session control functions
  • the IMS 168B includes a CSCF, which can act as a proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) 162BE, a serving CSCF (S-CSCF) 164B, an emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) (not illustrated in FIG. 1B), or interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) 166B.
  • the P-CSCF 162B can be configured to be the first contact point for the UE 102 within the IM subsystem (IMS) 168B.
  • the S-CSCF 164B can be configured to handle the session states in the network, and the E-CSCF can be configured to handle certain aspects of emergency sessions such as routing an emergency request to the correct emergency center or PSAP.
  • the I-CSCF 166B can be configured to function as the contact point within an operator's network for all IMS connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber currently located within that network operators service area.
  • the I-CSCF 166B can be connected to another IP multimedia network I70E, e.g. an IMS operated by a different network operator.
  • the UDM/HSS 146 can be coupled to an application server I60E, which can include a telephony application server (TAS) or another application server (AS).
  • the AS 160B can be coupled to the IMS 168B via the S-CSCF 164B or the I-CSCF 166B.
  • FIG. IB illustrates the following reference points: N1 (between the UE 102 and the AMF 132), N2 (between the RAN 110 and the AMF 132), N3 (between the RAN 110 and the UPF 134), N4 (between the SMF 136 and the UPF 134), N5 (between the PCF 148 and the AF 150, not shown), N6 (between the UPF 134 and the DN 152), N7 (between the SMF 136 and the PCF 148, not shown), N8 (between the UDM 146 and the AMF 132, not shown), N9 (between two UPFs 134, not shown), N10 (between the UDM 146 and the SMF 136, not shown), N11 (between the AMF 132 and the SMF 136, not shown), N12 (between the AUSF 144 and the AMF 132, not shown), N13 (between the AUSF 144 and the UDM 132 and the UDM
  • FIG. 1C illustrates a 5G system architecture 140C and a sendee- based representation.
  • system architecture 140C can also include a network exposure function (NEF) 154 and a network repository function (NRF) 156.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • NRF network repository function
  • 5G system architectures can be service-based and interaction between network functions can be represented by corresponding point-to-point reference points Ni or as service-based interfaces.
  • service-based representations can be used to represent network functions within the control plane that enable other authorized network functions to access their services.
  • 5G system architecture 140C can include the following service- based interfaces: Namf 158H (a service-based interface exhibited by the AMF 132), Nsmf 1581 (a service-based interface exhibited by the SMF 136), Nnef 158B (a service-based interface exhibited by the NEF 154), Npcf 158D (a service-based interface exhibited by the PCF 148), a Nudm 158E (a service- based interface exhibited by the UDM 146), Naf 158F (a service-based interface exhibited by the AF 150), Nnrf 158C (a service-based interface exhibited by the NRF 156), Nnssf 158A (a service-based interface exhibited by the NSSF 142), Nausf 158G (a service-based interface exhibited by the a service-based interface exhibited by the
  • FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. 7 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments in different communication systems, such as 5G-NR networks including IAB networks.
  • UEs, base stations (such as gNBs), and/or other nodes (e.g., any of the communication nodes in an IAB network) discussed in connection with FIGS. 1A-13 can be configured to perform the disclosed techniques.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a network 200 in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the network 200 may operate in a manner consistent with 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems.
  • 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems.
  • the example embodiments are not limited in this regard and the described embodiments may apply to other networks that benefit from the principles described herein, such as future 3GPP systems, or the like.
  • the network 200 may include a UE 202, which may include any mobile or non-mobile computing device designed to communicate with a RAN 204 via an over-the-air connection.
  • the UE 202 may be, but is not limited to, a smartphone, tablet computer, wearable computing device, desktop computer, laptop computer, in-vehicle infotainment, in-car entertainment device, instrument cluster, head-up display device, onboard diagnostic device, dashtop mobile equipment, mobile data terminal, electronic engine management system, electronic/engine control unit, electronic/engine control module, embedded system, sensor, microcontroller, control module, engine management system, networked appliance, machine-type communication device, M2M or D2D device, loT device, etc.
  • the network 200 may include a plurality of UEs coupled directly with one another via a sidelink interface.
  • the UEs may be M2M/D2D devices that communicate using physical sidelink channels such as but not limited to, PSBCH, PSDCH, PSSCH, PSCCH, PSFCH, etc.
  • the UE 202 may additionally communicate with an AP 206 via an over-the-air connection.
  • the AP 206 may manage a WLAN connection, which may serve to offload some/all network traffic from the RAN 204.
  • the connection between the UE 202 and the AP 206 may be consistent with any IEEE 802. 11 protocol, wherein the AP 206 could be a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi®) router.
  • the UE 202, RAN 204, and AP 206 may utilize cellular- WLAN aggregation (for example, LWA/LWIP).
  • Cellular-WLAN aggregation may involve the UE 202 being configured by the RAN 204 to utilize both cellular radio resources and WLAN resources.
  • the RAN 204 may include one or more access nodes, for example, access node (AN) 208.
  • AN 208 may terminate air-interface protocols for the UE 202 by providing access stratum protocols including RRC, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), Radio Link Control (RLC), MAC, and LI protocols.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • LI protocols Low Latency Control
  • the AN 208 may enable data/voice connectivity between the core network (CN) 220 and the UE 202.
  • the AN 208 may be implemented in a discrete device or as one or more software entities miming on server computers as part of, for example, a virtual network, which may be referred to as a CRAN or virtual baseband unit pool.
  • the AN 208 be referred to as a BS, gNB, RAN node, eNB, ng-eNB, NodeB, RSU, TRxP, TRP, etc.
  • the AN 208 may be a macrocell base station or a low-power base station for providing femtocells, picocells, or other like cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells.
  • the RAN 204 may be coupled with one another via an X2 interface (if the RAN 204 is an LTE RAN) or an Xn interface (if the RAN 204 is a 5(3- RAN).
  • the X2/Xn interfaces which may be separated into control/user plane interfaces in some embodiments, may allow the ANs to communicate information related to handovers, data/context transfers, mobility, load management, interference coordination, etc.
  • the ANs of the RAN 204 may each manage one or more cells, cell groups, component carriers, etc. to provide the UE 202 with an air interface for network access.
  • the UE 202 may be simultaneously connected with a plurality of cells provided by the same or different ANs of the RAN 204.
  • the UE 202 and RAN 204 may use carrier aggregation to allow the UE 202 to connect with a plurality of component carriers, each corresponding to a Pcell or Scell.
  • a first AN may be a master node that provides an MCG and a second AN may be a secondary node that provides an SCG.
  • the first/second ANs may be any combination of eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, etc.
  • the RAN 204 may provide the air interface over a licensed spectrum or an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the nodes may use LAA, eLAA, and/or feLAA mechanisms based on CA technology with PCells/Scells.
  • the nodes may perform medium/carrier-sensing operations based on, for example, a listen-before-talk (LBT) protocol.
  • LBT listen-before-talk
  • the UE 202 or AN 208 may be or act as a roadside unit (RSU), which may refer to any transportation infrastructure entity used for V2X communications.
  • RSU may be implemented in or by a suitable AN or a stationary (or relatively stationary) UE.
  • An RSU implemented in or by: a UE may be referred to as a “UE-type RSU”; an eNB may be referred to as an “eNB-type RSU”, a gNB may be referred to as a “gNB-type RSU”; and the like.
  • an RSU is a computing device coupled with radio frequency circuitry located on a roadside that provides connectivity support to passing vehicle UEs.
  • the RSU may also include internal data storage circuitry' to store intersection map geometry, traffic statistics, media, as well as applications/ software to sense and control ongoing vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
  • the RSU may provide very low latency communications required for high-speed events, such as crash avoidance, traffic warnings, and the like. Additionally, or alternatively, the RSU may provide other cellular/WLAN communications services.
  • the components of the RSU may be packaged in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for outdoor installation and may include a network interface controller to provide a wired connection (e.g., Ethernet) to a traffic signal controller or a backhaul network.
  • the RAN 204 may be an LTE RAN 210 with eNBs, for example, eNB 212.
  • the LTE RAN 210 may provide an LTE air interface with the following characteristics: sub-carrier spacing (SCS) of 15 kHz; CP-OFDM waveform for downlink (DL) and SC-FDMA waveform for uplink (UL); turbo codes for data and TBCC for control; etc.
  • SCS sub-carrier spacing
  • DL downlink
  • UL uplink
  • turbo codes for data and TBCC for control
  • the LTE air interface may rely on CSI-RS for CSI acquisition and beam management;
  • the LTE air interface may operate on sub-6 GHz bands.
  • the RAN 204 may be an NG-RAN 214 with gNBs, for example, gNB 216, or ng-eNBs, for example, ng-eNB 218.
  • the gNB 216 may connect with 5G-enab1ed UEs using a 5G NR interface.
  • the gNB 216 may connect with a 5G core through an NG interface, which may include an N2 interface or an N3 interface.
  • the ng-eNB 218 may also connect with the 5G core through an NG interface but. may connect with a UE via an LTE air interface.
  • the gNB 216 and the ng-eNB 218 may connect over an Xn interface.
  • the NG interface may be split into two parts, an NG user plane (NG-U) interface, which carries traffic data between the nodes of the NG-RAN 214 and a UPF 248 (e.g., N3 interface), and an NG control plane (NG-C) interface, which is a signaling interface between the nodes of the NG-RAN214 and an AMF 244 (e.g., N2 interface).
  • NG-U NG user plane
  • N-C NG control plane
  • the NG-RAN 214 may provide a 5G-NR air interface with the following characteristics: variable SCS; CP-OFDM for DL, CP-OFDM and DFT-s-OFDM for UL, polar, repetition, simplex, and Reed-Muller codes for control and LDPC for data.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may rely on CSI-RS, PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS similar to the LTE air interface.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may not use a CRS but may use PBCH DMRS for PBCH demodulation; PTRS for phase tracking for PDSCH and tracking reference signal for time tracking.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may operate on FR1 bands that include sub-6 GHz bands or FR2 bands that include bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz.
  • the 5G-NR air interface may include a synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) block (SSB ) that is an area of a downlink resource grid that includes PSS/SSS/PBCH.
  • SS/PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the 5G-NR air interface may utilize BWPs (bandwidth parts) for various purposes.
  • BWP can be used for dynamic adaptation of the SCS.
  • the UE 202 can be configured with multiple BWPs where each BWP configuration has a different SCS. When a BWP change is indicated to the UE 202, the SCS of the transmission is changed as well.
  • Another use case example of BWP is related to power saving.
  • multiple BWPs can be configured for the UE 202 with different amounts of frequency resources (for example, PRBs) to support data transmission under different traffic loading scenarios.
  • a BWP containing a smaller number of PRBs can be used for data transmission with a small traffic load while allowing power saving at the UE 202 and in some cases at the gNB 216.
  • a BWP containing a larger number of PRBs can be used for scenarios with higher traffic loads.
  • the RAN 204 is communicatively coupled to CN 220 that includes network elements to provide various functions to support data and telecommunications services to customers/subscribers (for example, users of UE 202).
  • the components of the CN 220 may be implemented in one physical node or separate physical nodes.
  • NFV may be utilized to virtualize any or all of the functions provided by the network elements of the CN 220 onto physical compute/storage resources in seivers, switches, etc.
  • a logical instantiation of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network slice, and a logical instantiation of a portion of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network sub- slice.
  • the CN 220 may be connected to the LTE radio network as part of the Enhanced Packet System (EPS) 222, which may also be referred to as an EPC (or enhanced packet core).
  • the EPC 222 may include MME 224, SGW 226, SGSN 228, HSS 230, PGW 232, and PCRF 234 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the EPC 222 may be briefly introduced as follows.
  • the MME 224 may implement mobility management functions to track the current location of the UE 202 to facilitate paging, bearer activation/deactivation, handovers, gateway selection, authentication, etc.
  • the SGW 226 may terminate an SI interface toward the RAN and route data packets between the RAN and the EPC 222.
  • the SGW 226 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
  • the SGSN 228 may track the location of the UE 202 and perform security functions and access control. In addition, the SGSN 228 may perform inter-EPC node signaling for mobility between different RAT networks; PDN and S-GW selection as specified by MME 224; MME selection for handovers, etc.
  • the S3 reference point between the MME 224 and the SGSN 228 may enable user and bearer information exchange for inter-3 GPP access network mobility in idle/active states.
  • the HSS 230 may include a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions.
  • the HSS 230 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc.
  • An S6a reference point between the HSS 230 and the MME 224 may enable the transfer of subscription and authentication data for authenticating/authorizing user access to the LTE CN 220.
  • the PGW 232 may terminate an SGi interface toward a data network (DN) 236 that may include an application/ content server 238.
  • the PGW 232 may route data packets between the LTE CN 220 and the data network 236.
  • the PGW 232 may be coupled with the SGW 226 by an S5 reference point to facilitate user plane tunneling and tunnel management.
  • the PGW 232 may further include a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection (for example, PCEF).
  • the SGi reference point between the PGW 232 and the data network 236 may be an operator external public, a private PDN, or an intra-operator packet data network, for example, for provision of IMS services.
  • the PGW 232 may be coupled with a PCRF 234 via a Gx reference point.
  • the PCRF 234 is the policy and charging control element of the LTE CN 220.
  • the PCRF 234 may be communicatively coupled to the app/content server 238 to determine appropriate QoS and charging parameters for service flows.
  • the PCRF 234 may provision associated rules into a PCEF (via Gx reference point) with appropriate ITT and QCI.
  • the CN 220 may be a 5GC 240.
  • the 5GC 240 may include an AUSF 242, AMF 244, SMF 246, UPF 248, NSSF 250, NEF 252, NRF 254, PCF 256, UDM 258, and AF 260 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown.
  • Functions of the elements of the 5GC 240 may be briefly introduced as follows.
  • the AUSF 242 may store data for authentication of UE 202 and handle authentication -related functionality.
  • the AUSF 242 may facilitate a common authentication framework for various access types.
  • the AUSF 242 may exhibit a Nausf service-based interface.
  • the AMF 244 may allow other functions of the 5GC 240 to communicate with the UE 202 and the RAN 204 and to subscribe to notifications about mobility events with respect to the UE 202.
  • the AMF 244 may be responsible for registration management (for example, for registering UE 202), connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception of AMF -related events, and access authentication and authorization.
  • the AMF 244 may provide transport for SM messages between the UE 202 and the SMF 246, and act as a transparent proxy for routing SM messages.
  • AMF 244 may also provide transport for SMS messages between UE 202 and an SMSF.
  • AMF 244 may interact with the AUSF 242 and the UE 202 to perform various security anchor and context management functions.
  • AMF 244 may be a termination point of a RAN CP interface, which may include or be an N2 reference point between the RAN 204 and the AMF 244; and the AMF 244 may be a termination point of NAS (Nl) signaling, and perform NAS ciphering and integrity protection.
  • AMF 244 may also support NAS signaling with the UE 202 over an N3 IWF interface.
  • the SMF 246 may be responsible for SM (for example, session establishment, tunnel management between UPF 248 and AN 208); UE IP address allocation and management (including optional authorization); selection and control of UP function, confi guring traffic steering at UPF 248 to route traffic to proper destination; termination of interfaces toward policy control functions; controlling part of policy enforcement, charging, and QoS; lawful intercept (for SM ⁇ events and interface to LI sy stem); termination of SM: parts of NAS messages; downlink data notification; initiating AN specific SM information, sent via AMF 244 over N2 to AN 208; and determining SSC mode of a session.
  • SM may refer to the management of a PDU session, and a PDU session or “session” may refer to a PDU connectivity service that provides or enables the exchange of PDUs between the UE 202 and the data network 236.
  • the UPF 248 may act as an anchor point for intra-RAT and inter- RAT mobility, an external PDU session point of interconnecting to data network 236, and a branching point to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
  • the UPF 248 may also perform packet routing and forwarding, perform packet inspection, enforce the user plane part of policy rules, lawfully intercept packets (UP collection), perform traffic usage reporting, perform QoS handling for a user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, UL/DL rate enforcement), perform uplink traffic verification (e.g., SDF-to-QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, and perform downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering.
  • UPF 248 may include an uplink classifier to support routing traffic flows to a data network.
  • the NSSF 250 may select a set of network slice instances serving the UE 202.
  • the NSSF 250 may also determine allowed NSSAI and the mapping to the subscribed S-NSSAIs if needed.
  • the NSSF 250 may also determine the AMF set to be used to serve the UE 202, or a list of candidate AMFs based on a suitable configuration and possibly by querying the NRF 254.
  • the selection of a set of network slice instances for the UE 202 may be triggered by the AMF 244 with which the UE 202 is registered by interacting with the NSSF 250, which may lead to a change of AMF.
  • the NSSF 250 may interact with the AMF 244 via an N22 reference point, and may communicate with another NSSF in a visited network via an N31 reference point (not shown). Additionally, the NSSF 250 may exhibit an Nnssf service-based interface.
  • the NEF 252 may securely expose services and capabilities provided by 3 GPP network functions for the third party, internal exposure/re- exposure, AFs (e.g., AF 260), edge computing or fog computing systems, etc.
  • the NEF 252 may authenticate, authorize, or throttle the AFs.
  • NEF 252 may also translate information exchanged with the AF 260 and information exchanged with internal network functions. For example, the NEF 252 may translate between an AF-Service-Identifier and an internal 5GC information.
  • NEF 252 may also receive information from other NFs based on the exposed capabilities of other NFs. This information may be stored at the NEF 252 as structured data, or a data storage NF using standardized interfaces. The stored information can then be re-exposed by the NEF 252 to other NFs and AFs, or used for other purposes such as analytics. Additionally, the NEF 252 may exhibit a Nnef service-based interface.
  • the NRF 254 may support service discovery' functions, receive NF discovery requests from NF instances, and provide the information of the discovered NF instances to the NF instances. NRF 254 also maintains information on available NF instances and their supported services. As used herein, the terms “instantiate,” “instantiation,” and the like may refer to the creation of an instance, and an “instance” may refer to a concrete occurrence of an object, which may occur, for example, during the execution of program code. Additionally, the NRF 254 may exhibit the Nnrf service-based interface.
  • the PCF 256 may provide policy rules to control plane functions to enforce them, and may also support a unified policy framework to govern network behavior.
  • the PCF 256 may also implement a front end to access subscription information relevant for policy decisions in a UDR of the UDM 258.
  • the PCF 256 exhibits an Npcf service-based interface.
  • the UDM 258 may handle subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions and may store the subscription data of UE 202.
  • subscription data may be communicated via an N8 reference point between the UDM 258 and the AMF 244.
  • the UDM 258 may include two parts, an application front end, and a user data repository (UDR) (not illustrated in FIG. 2).
  • the UDR may store subscription data and policy data for the UDM 258 and the PCF 256, and/or structured data for exposure and application data (including PFDs for application detection, application request information for multiple UEs 202) for the NEF 252.
  • a Nudr service-based interface may be exhibited by the UDR to allow the UDM 258, PCF 256, and NEF 252 to access a particular set of the stored data, as well as to read, update (e.g., add, modify), delete, and subscribe to the notification of relevant data changes in the UDR.
  • the UDM may include a UDM-FE, which is in charge of processing credentials, location management, subscription management, and so on. Several different front ends may serve the same user in different transactions.
  • the UDM-FE accesses subscription information stored in the UDR and performs authentication credential processing, user identification handling, access authorization, registration/mobility management, and subscription management.
  • the UDM 258 may exhibit the Nudm service-based interface.
  • the AF 260 may provide application influence on traffic routing, provide access to NEF, and interact with the policy framework for policy control.
  • the 5GC 240 may enable edge computing by selecting operator/3rd party services to be geographically close to a point that the UE 202 is attached to the network. This may reduce latency and load on the network.
  • the 5GC 240 may select a UPF 248 close to the UE 202 and execute traffic steering from the UPF 248 to data network 236 via the N6 interface. This may be based on the UE subscription data, UE location, and information provided by the AF 260. In this way, the AF 260 may influence UPF (re)selection and traffic routing.
  • the network operator may permit AF 260 to interact directly with relevant NFs. Additionally, the AF 260 may exhibit a Naf service-based interface.
  • the data network 236 may represent various network operator services, Internet access, or third-party services that may be provided by one or more servers including, for example, application/ content server 238.
  • FIG. 3 schematically illustrates a wireless network 300 in accordance with various embodiments.
  • the wireless network 300 may include a UE 302 in wireless communication with AN 304.
  • the UE 302 and AN 304 may be similar to, and substantially interchangeable with, like-named components described elsewhere herein.
  • the UE 302 may be communicatively coupled with the AN 304 via connection 306.
  • the connection 306 is illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols such as an LTE protocol or a 5G NR protocol operating at mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies.
  • the UE 302 may include a host platform 308 coupled with a modem platform 310.
  • the host platform 308 may include application processing circuitry 312, which may be coupled with protocol processing circuitry? 314 of the modem platform 310.
  • the application processing circuitry' 312 may run various applications for the UE 302 that source/ sink application data.
  • the application processing circuitry 312 may further implement one or more layer operations to transmit/receive application data to/from a data network. These layer operations may include transport (for example UDP) and Internet (for example, IP) operations
  • the protocol processing circuitry 314 may implement one or more layer operations to facilitate transmission or reception of data over the connection 306.
  • the layer operations implemented by the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include, for example, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, and NAS operations.
  • the modem platform 310 may further include digital baseband circuitry 316 that may implement one or more layer operations that are “below 7 ” layer operations performed by the protocol processing circuitry 314 m a network protocol stack. These operations may include, for example, PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding, which may include one or more of space-time, space- frequency or spatial coding, reference signal generation/detection, preamble sequence generation and/or decoding, synchronization sequence generation/detection, control channel signal blind decoding, and other related functions.
  • PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding
  • the modem platform 310 may further include transmit circuitry' 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, and RF front end (RFFE) 324, which may include or connect to one or more antenna panels 326.
  • the transmit circuitry 318 may include a digital-to-analog converter, mixer, intermediate frequency (IF) components, etc.
  • the receive circuitry 320 may include an analog-to-digital converter, mixer, IF components, etc.
  • the RF circuitry 322 may include a low-noise amplifier, a power amplifier, power tracking components, etc.
  • RFFE 324 may include filters (for example, surface/bulk acoustic wave filters), switches, antenna tuners, beamforming components (for example, phase-array antenna components), etc.
  • transmit/receive components may be specific to details of a specific implementation such as, for example, whether the communication is TDM or I DM, in mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies, etc.
  • the transmit/receive components may be arranged in multiple parallel transmit/receive chains, may be disposed of in the same or different chips/modules, etc.
  • the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include one or more instances of control circuitry (not shown) to provide control functions for the transmit/receive components.
  • a UE reception may be established by and via the antenna panels 326, RFFE 324, RF circuitry 322, receive circuitry 320, digital baseband circuitry 316, and protocol processing circuitry 314.
  • the antenna panels 326 may receive a transmission from the AN 304 by receive- beamforming signals received by a plurality of antennas/ antenna elements of the one or more antenna panels 326.
  • a UE transmission may be established by and via the protocol processing circuitry 314, digital baseband circuitry 316, transmit circuitry 318, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326.
  • the transmit components of the UE 302 may apply a spatial filter to the data to be transmitted to form a transmit beam emitted by the antenna elements of the antenna panels 326.
  • the AN 304 may include a host platform 328 coupled with a modem platform 330.
  • the host platform 328 may include application processing circuitry 332 coupled with protocol processing circuitry 334 of the modem platform 330.
  • the modem platform may further include digital baseband circuitry 336, transmit circuitry 338, receive circuitry 340, RF circuitry 342, RFFE circuitry 344, and antenna panels 346.
  • the components of the AN 304 may be similar to and substantially interchangeable with like-named components of the UE 302.
  • the components of the AN 304 may perform various logical functions that include, for example, RNC functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating components, according to some example embodiments, able to read instructions from a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (e.g., a non-transitory machine-readable storage medium) and perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein.
  • FIG. 4 shows a diagrammatic representation of hardware resources 400 including one or more processors (or processor cores) 410, one or more memory, ''storage devices 420, and one or more communication resources 430, each of which may be communicatively coupled via a bus 440 or other interface circuitry.
  • the processors 410 may include, for example, a processor 412 and a processor 414.
  • the processors 410 may be, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), a reduced instruction set computing (RISC) processor, a complex instruction set computing (CISC) processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), a DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • RISC reduced instruction set computing
  • CISC complex instruction set computing
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
  • the memory/storage devices 420 may include a main memory, disk storage, or any suitable combination thereof.
  • the memory/storage devices 420 may include but are not limited to, any type of volatile, non-volatile, or semi-volatile memory such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM ), static random access memory (SRAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), Flash memory, solid-state storage, etc.
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • Flash memory solid-state storage, etc.
  • the communication resources 430 may include interconnection or network interface controllers, components, or other suitable devices to communicate with one or more peripheral devices 404 or one or more databases 406 or other network elements via a network 408.
  • the communication resources 430 may include wired communication components (e.g., for coupling via USB, Ethernet, etc.), cellular communication components, NFC components, Bluetooth® (or Bluetooth® Low Energy) components, Wi- Fi® components, and other communication components.
  • Instructions 450 may comprise software, a program, an application, an applet, an app, or other executable code for causing at least any of the processors 410 to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein.
  • the instructions 450 may reside, completely or partially, within at least one of the processors 410 (e.g., within the processor's cache memory), the memory/storage devices 420, or any suitable combination thereof.
  • any portion of the instructions 450 may be transferred to the hardware resources 400 from any combination of the peripheral devices 404 or the databases 406.
  • the memory of processors 410, the memory/storage devices 420, the peripheral devices 404, and the databases 406 are examples of computer-readable and machine-readable media.
  • At least one of the components outlined in one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to perform one or more operations, techniques, processes, and/or methods as outlined in the example sections below.
  • baseband circuitry associated with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below.
  • circuitry associated with a UE, base station, satellite, network element, etc. as described above in connection with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below in the example section.
  • AI/ML application may refer to a complete and deployable package, environment to achieve a certain function in an operational environment.
  • AI/ML application or the like may be an application that contains some artificial intelligence (AI)/machine learning (ML) models and application -level descriptions.
  • AI/ML application may be used for configuring or implementing one or more of the disclosed aspects.
  • machine learning refers to the use of computer systems implementing algorithms and/or statistical models to perform a specific task(s) without using explicit instructions but instead relying on patterns and inferences.
  • ML algorithms build or estimate mathematical model(s) (referred to as “ML models” or the like) based on sample data (referred to as “training data,” “model training information,” or the like) to make predictions or decisions without being explicitly programmed to perform such tasks.
  • an ML algorithm is a computer program that learns from experience with respect to some task and some performance measure
  • an ML model may be any object or data structure created after an ML algorithm is trained with one or more training datasets. After training, an ML model may be used to make predictions on new datasets.
  • ML algorithm refers to different concepts than the term “ML model,” these terms as discussed herein may be used interchangeably for the present disclosure.
  • machine learning model may also refer to ML methods and concepts used by an ML-assisted solution.
  • An “ML-assisted solution” is a solution that addresses a specific use case using ML algorithms during operation.
  • ML models include supervised learning (e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.) unsupervised learning (e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.), reinforcement learning (e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit learning, deep RL, etc.), neural networks, and the like.
  • supervised learning e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.
  • unsupervised learning e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.
  • reinforcement learning e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit
  • An “ML pipeline” is a set of functionalities, functions, or functional entities specific for an ML-assisted solution, an ML. pipeline may include one or several data sources in a data pipeline, a model training pipeline, a model evaluation pipeline, and an actor.
  • the “actor” is an entity that hosts an ML-assisted solution using the output of the ML model inference).
  • ML training host refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the training of the model.
  • ML inference host refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the model during inference mode (which includes both the model execution as well as any online learning if applicable).
  • the ML-host informs the actor about the output of the ML algorithm, and the actor decides for an action (an “action” is performed by an actor as a result of the output of an ML-assisted solution).
  • model inference information refers to information used as an input to the ML model for determining inference(s); the data used to train an ML model and the data used to determine inferences may overlap, however, “training data” and “inference data” refer to different concepts.
  • the disclosed techniques introduce TPC for a distributed unit (DU) command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes: [00103] (a) UL TPC for DU: UL TPC command from an IAB mobile termination (MT) to a parent DU to indicate parent DU's DL TX power adjustment; and
  • TPC for DU DL. TPC command from a parent DU to an
  • the received signal at an LAB DU may have interference coming from a co-located MT's DL reception (parent DU's DL transmission).
  • DL power control schemes in current IAB specifications for an IAB MT or a UE to inform its parent to adjust its DL power control.
  • Only UL power control schemes exist including DL transmit power control (TPC) command from parent DU to an IAB MT or a UE to adjust its UL transmission power.
  • TPC transmit power control
  • a UL TPC command for the DU to indicate to parent DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a UL TPC for DU command.
  • the received signal at the parent DU may have interference coming from the DU's DL transmission.
  • a parent DU can send dynamic DL transmit power control (TPC) command for the MT to increase its UL transmission power.
  • TPC transmit power control
  • the UL transmission power is limited by the MT's capability and may not fully resolve this issue.
  • DL TPC command for DU from parent DU to an IAB MT to indicate the co-located IAB DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a DL. TPC for DU command.
  • an IAB node can connect to its parent node (an IAB donor or another IAB node) through a parent backhaul (BH) link, connect to a child user equipment (UE) through a child access (AC) link, and connect to a child IAB node through a child BH link.
  • parent node an IAB donor or another IAB node
  • UE child user equipment
  • AC child access
  • FIG. 5 show's a reference diagram for IAB in a standalone mode, which contains one IAB donor node 503 and multiple IAB nodes (e.g., 514, 516, 518, 522, and 524).
  • the IAB architecture 500 can include a core network (CN) 502 coupled to an IAB donor node 503.
  • the IAB donor node 503 can include control unit control plane (CU-CP) function 504, control unit user plane (CU-UP) function 506, other functions 508, and distributed unit (DU) functions 510 and 512.
  • the DU function 510 can be coupled via wireless backhaul links to IAB nodes 514 and 516.
  • the DU function 512 is coupled via a wireless backhaul link to TAB node 518.
  • TAB node 514 is coupled to a UE 520 via a wireless access link
  • IAB node 516 is coupled to IAB nodes 522 and 524.
  • the IAB node 522 is coupled to UE 528 via a wireless access link.
  • the IAB node 518 is coupled to UE 526 via a wireless access link.
  • Each of the IAB nodes illustrated in FIG. 5 can include a mobile termination (MT) function and a DU function.
  • the MI' function can be defined as a component of the mobile equipment and can be referred to as a function residing on an IAB node that terminates the radio interface layers of the backhaul Uu interface toward the IAB donor or other IAB nodes.
  • the IAB donor 503 is treated as a single logical node that comprises a set of functions such as gNB-DU, gNB-CU-CP 504, gNB-CU-UP 506, and potentially other functions 508.
  • the IAB donor 503 can be split according to these functions, which can all be either collocated or non- collocated as allowed by 3GPP NG-RAN architecture. IAB-related aspects may arise when such a split is exercised.
  • some of the functions presently associated with the IAB donor may eventually be moved outside of the donor in case it becomes evident that they do not perform lAB-specific tasks.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU)-distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an LAB architecture 600, in accordance with some aspects.
  • the IAB architecture 600 includes an IAB donor 601, a parent IAB node 603, an IAB node 605, a child IAB node 607, and a child UE 609.
  • the IAB donor 601 includes a CU function 602 and a DU function 604.
  • the parent IAB node 603 includes a parent MT (P-MT) function 606 and a parent DU (P-DU) function 608.
  • the IAB node 605 includes an MT function 610 and a DU function 612.
  • the child IAB node 607 includes a child MT (C- MT) function 614 and a child DU (C-DU) function 616.
  • RRC signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the MT functions 606, 610, and 614, as well as between the CU function 602 and the child UE (C-UE) 609. Additionally, Fl access protocol (F1AP) signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the DU functions of the parent LAB node 603 and the IAB node 605.
  • F1AP Fl access protocol
  • multiple IAB nodes are connected to a donor node (DN) via a wireless backhaul.
  • a DN or a parent LAB node needs to properly allocate resources for its child IAB node under the half-duplex constraint at the child IAB node.
  • the time-frequency resource allocated to the parent link may be orthogonal to the time-frequency resource allocated to the child or access link.
  • each IAB node holds a DU and an MT function.
  • the LAB node connects to its parent LAB node or the lAB-donor like a UE.
  • the IAB node communicates with its child UEs and child MTs like a base station.
  • RRC signaling is used between the CU in the LAB donor and the UE/MT, while Fl AP signaling is used between the CU and the DU in an IAB node.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates an example of the IAB CU/DU split architecture and signaling
  • w'here MT and DU in a parent LAB node are indicated as P-MT/P- DU
  • MT and DU in a child IAB node are indicated as C-MT/C-DU
  • a child UE is indicated as C-UE.
  • a TDM -based DU function and an MT function may be supported within an IAB node.
  • Extended IAB functionalities include duplexing enhancements to increase spectral efficiency and reduce latency through the support of SDM/FDM-based resource management, through simultaneous transmissions, and/or reception on lAB-nodes.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios 700, in accordance with some aspects.
  • simultaneous operation (transmission and/or reception) of lAB-node's child and parent links includes four cases as below (illustrated in FIG. 7):
  • DL power control (MT informs its parent DU to adjust its DL transmission power) is needed for IAB backhaul.
  • the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset (different Cases associated with an IAB network are listed below).
  • the disclosed techniques include two TA mechanisms to support simultaneous operations:
  • Mechanism 1 Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced; and [00126] Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case#l TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
  • Case #4 within an lAB-node, when transmitting using case 2 while when receiving using case 3;
  • Case #5 Case #1 for access link timing and Case 4 for backhaul link timing within an lAB-node in different time slots;
  • the UL transmission timing of an lAB-node can be aligned with the JAB-node's DL transmission timing.
  • the UL reception timing of an l AB-node can be aligned with the lAB-node's DL reception timing;
  • Case #1 is supported for both access and backhaul link transmission timing alignment and applied to Rel-16 LAB.
  • Case #2 - Case #5 are not supported for IAB.
  • the disclosed techniques may be based on the following timing alignment considerations: [00143] (a) Case #7 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #2 (simultaneous MT-Rx/DU-Rx).
  • Case #6 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #1 (simultaneous MT-Tx/DU-Tx).
  • Case #7 timing is supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #4 (simultaneous MT- Tx/DU-Rx).
  • Timing relationships for different simultaneous operations are discussed herein.
  • MT-RXZDU-TX since parent DU TX timing and DU TX timing cannot be changed, the timing relationship follows current Case #1 timing and is not discussed.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates diagram 800 of parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • MT parent IAB node mobile termination
  • DU parent IAB node distributed unit
  • FIG. 8 there is illustrated the timing relationship with Case #7 timing for simultaneous parent-MT RX/parent-DU RX operation at a parent LAB node.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a diagram 900 of TA case1 /T p /T g relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
  • the parent-MT RX timing at the parent IAB node is related to parent-MT receiving propagation delay T p0 .
  • the IAB-MT has timing advance control (original Case #1 timing) of TA with IAB-MT receiving propagation delay T p .
  • the following definitions may be used: [00151] (a) TA case1 : The original Case#! TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #1 timing mode;
  • the TA offset,Case7 value can be derived with the following steps: [00158] (a) IAB-MT RX timing is T p behind DL TX timing. IAB-MT TX
  • Case #1 timing is TA Case1 ahead of IAB-MT RX timing.
  • IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TA Case1 -T v ahead of DL TX timing.
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T A Case1 -2T p ahead of DL TX timing.
  • Parent-MT RX timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing.
  • DU RX Case #7 timing is the same as parent-MT RX timing.
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing.
  • TX timing (from Step a).
  • Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is T p0 behind DL TX timing (from Step b).
  • ⁇ Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T A Case1 -2T p +T p0 ahead of Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing.
  • ⁇ IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TA Case1 -2T p +T p0 ahead of IAB-MT TX Case#7 timing.
  • TA offset,Case7 TA Case1 -27 p +T p0 .
  • TA case1 2T p + T q (as illustrated in FIG.. 9).
  • ⁇ TA offset,Case7 TA case1 -2T p + T p0 (from Step c).
  • ⁇ TA offset,Case7 T p0 + T g .
  • the Case #7 TA in Equation (2) may be negative, which is one issue that, is addressed by the present techniques for Case #7 timing.
  • the LAB node with Case #7 timing may also need to address the issue of different parent-DU RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to Case #7 timing and legacy IAB nodes and UEs which are still in Case #1 timing.
  • the disclosed techniques address another issue to enable Case #7 timing at a parent TAB node, namely, when an lAB-MT's TA is changed from Case #1 TA to Case #7 TA, it will cause an issue for the IAB- node to decide its DL TX timing. Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX with Case #6 Timing
  • FIG. 10 illustrates diagram 1000 of Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 10 illustrates the timing relationship with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX operation.
  • LAB MT TX timing original Case #1 timing
  • the MT's TX timing may be shifted to align with the DU's TX timing.
  • the shifting offset from Case #1 timing to Case #6 timing can be easily calculated as
  • Case #6 TA when Case #6 TA is transmitted instead of Case #1 TA, the LAB node may not calculate its DL TX timing based on the Case #6 TA.
  • the parent IAB node needs to address the issue of different parent DLT RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to the new' Case #6 timing and legacy IAB nodes which are still in Case #1 timing.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a diagram 1100 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a diagram 1200 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 illustrate trvo possible timing relationships with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX operation at an IAB node, either by shifting its child IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 11) or by shifting the IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 12). The shifting offset and the new TA for child MT in FIG. 11 are (Note that.
  • TA offsets for the two possible timing relationships may be positive or negative, but the new TAs are positive.
  • (A) Mechanism 1 Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
  • the following two procedures may be configured: one to modify the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new TA range for simultaneous operation, and another one to introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing.
  • Procedure 1 Modify current TA transmission scheme to accommodate new TA range for simultaneous operations.
  • TA MT T p0 + T g .
  • Option I modify TA command in medium access control random access response (MAC RAR).
  • MAC RAR medium access control random access response
  • N TA + N TA,offset • T c (e.g., TS38.211-4.3.1), where the value of (note that this is a fixed offset and not the offset discussed in this disclosure) depends on the duplex mode of the cell in which the uplink transmission takes place and the frequency range (FR) and is defined in TS38.133 Table 7.1.2-2.
  • the TA range may be changed, to accommodate possibly negative TA for MT-RXZDU-RX.
  • One option is to pre-define a minimum T A min value, which can be negative and transmit positive T A, sim in TA command in MAC RAR.
  • the new TA (T TA, sim ) may be determined as follows:
  • MAC RAR 0,1,2, ... ,7692 is communicated in MAC RAR, which needs to extend the current 12 bits TA command field in MAC ICAR to 13 bits.
  • Option 2 modify the TA command in MAC CE.
  • the TA can be further modified in the TA command in the MAC CE.
  • T A max is a pre-defined value and transmit positive T A,sim in TA command MAC CE.
  • Option 1 and Option 2 can be applied independently and jointly .
  • Case #1 TA ( TA case#1 ) defined in the current specification can be re-used and always transmitted, which means the current TA command RAR and TA command MAC CE may not be modified.
  • the IAB MI' can calculate the new TA for MT TX timing as TA new — TA case#1 --- TA sim,offset .
  • Option 1 introduce new field in MAC RAR
  • Option 2 introduce new field in existing TA command MAC
  • Option 3 introduce a new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE.
  • T sim,offset,min the value may be pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit positive T sim,offset in the timing offset Command.
  • the TA offset may be defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TA case#1 ) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
  • the TA offset can also be defined as TA new minus TA Case#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar:
  • the LAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset.
  • mechanism 1 may be used, which includes transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations; and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
  • procedure 1 includes modifying the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new I' A range for simultaneous operations.
  • Option 1 includes modifying the TA command in MAC RAR (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
  • Option 2 includes modifying the TA command in MAC CE (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
  • Procedure 2 includes introducing additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
  • Mechanism 2 includes always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset (e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above) transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
  • additional TA offset e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above
  • the following signaling options may be used: Option 1 (introduce new field in MAC RAR), Option 2 (introduce new field in existing TA command MAC CE), and Option 3 (introduce new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE).
  • T sim,offset,min (T sim,offset,min + T sim,offset ) • 16 •64/2 ⁇ .
  • the TA offset is defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TA case#1 ) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects and to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
  • the communication device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other communication devices.
  • Circuitry e.g., processing circuitry'
  • circuitry is a collection of circuits implemented in tangible entities of the devi ce 1300 that include hardware (e.g., simple circuits, gates, logic, etc.). Circuitry membership may be flexible over time. Circuitries include members that may, alone or in combination, perform specified operations when operating. In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may be immutably designed to carry' out a specific operation (e.g., hardwired).
  • the hardware of the circuitry may include variably connected physical components (e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.) including a machine-readable medium physically modified (e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.) to encode instructions of the specific operation.
  • variably connected physical components e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.
  • machine-readable medium e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.
  • the underlying electrical properties of a hardware constituent are changed, for example, from an insulator to a conductor or vice versa.
  • the instructions enable embedded hardware (e.g., the execution units or a loading mechanism) to create members of the circuitry' in hardware via the variable connections to carry out portions of the specific operation when in operation.
  • the machine-readable medium elements are part of the circuitry or are communicatively coupled to the other components of the circuitry when the device is operating.
  • any of the physical components may be used in more than one member of more than one circuitry.
  • execution units may be used in a first circuit of a first circuitry at one point in time and reused by a second circuit in the first circuitry, or by a third circuit in a second circuitry at a different time. Additional examples of these components with respect to the device 1300 follow.
  • the device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other devices.
  • the communication device 1300 may operate in the capacity of a server communication device, a client communication device, or both in server- client network environments.
  • the communication device 1300 may act as a peer communication device in a peer-to-peer (P2P) (or other distributed) network environment.
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • the communication device 1300 may be a UE, eNB, PC, a tablet PC, an STB, a PDA, a mobile telephone, a smartphone, a web appliance, a network router, switch or bridge, or any communication device capable of executing instructions (sequential or otherwise) that specify actions to be taken by that communication device.
  • the term "communication device” shall also be taken to include any collection of communication devices that individually or jointly execute a set (or multiple sets) of instructions to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein, such as cloud computing, software as a service (SaaS), and other computer cluster configurations.
  • Examples, as described herein, may include, or may operate on, logic or a number of components, modules, or mechanisms.
  • Modules are tangible entities (e.g., hardware) capable of performing specified operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner.
  • circuits may be arranged (e.g., internally or with respect to external entities such as other circuits) in a specified manner as a module.
  • the whole or part of one or more computer systems e.g., a standalone, client, or server computer system
  • one or more hardware processors may be configured by firmware or software (e.g., instructions, an application portion, or an application) as a module that operates to perform specified operations.
  • the software may reside on a communication device-readable medium.
  • the software when executed by the underlying hardware of the module, causes the hardware to perform the specified operations.
  • module is understood to encompass a tangible entity, be that an entity that is physically constructed, specifically configured (e.g., hardwired), or temporarily (e.g., transitorily) configured (e.g., programmed) to operate in a specified manner or to perform part or all of any operation described herein.
  • each of the modules need not be instantiated at any one moment in time.
  • the modules comprise a general-purpose hardware processor configured using the software
  • the general-purpose hardware processor may be configured as respective different modules at different times.
  • the software may accordingly configure a hardware processor, for example, to constitute a particular module at one instance of time and to constitute a different module at a different instance of time.
  • the communication device e.g., UE 1300 may include a hardware processor 1302 (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a hardware processor core, or any combination thereof), a main memory 1304, a static memory 1306, and a storage device 1307 (e.g., hard drive, tape drive, flash storage, or other block or storage devices), some or all of which may communicate with each other via an interlink (e.g., bus) 1308.
  • the communication device 1300 may further include a display device 1310, an alphanumeric input device 1312 (e.g., a keyboard), and a user interface (UI) navigation device 1314 (e.g., a mouse).
  • UI user interface
  • the display device 1310, input device 1312, and UI navigation device 1314 may be a touchscreen display.
  • the communication device 1300 may additionally include a signal generation device 1318 (e.g., a speaker), a network interface device 1320, and one or more sensors 1321, such as a global positioning system (GPS) sensor, compass, accelerometer, or another sensor.
  • the communication device 1300 may include an output controller 1328, such as a serial (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card reader, etc.).
  • a serial e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card
  • the storage device 1307 may include a communication device- readable medium 1322, on which is stored one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324 (e.g,, software) embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein.
  • registers of the processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory 1306, and/or the storage device 1307 may be, or include (completely or at least partially), the device-readable medium 1322, on which is stored the one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324, embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein.
  • one or any combination of the hardware processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory' 1306, or the mass storage 1316 may constitute the device-readable medium 1322.
  • the term "device-readable medium” is interchangeable with “computer-readable medium” or “machine-readable medium”. While the communication device-readable medium 1322 is illustrated as a single medium, the term “communication device-readable medium” may include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, and/or associated caches and servers) configured to store the one or more instructions 1324.
  • communication device-readable medium is inclusive of the terms “machine-readable medium” or “computer-readable medium”, and may include any medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions (e.g., instructions 1324) for execution by the communication device 1300 and that causes the communication device 1300 to perform any one or more of the techniques of the present disclosure, or that is capable of storing, encoding or carrying data structures used by or associated with such instructions.
  • Non-limiting communication device-readable medium examples may include solid-state memories and optical and magnetic media.
  • communication device-readable media may include non- volatile memory, such as semiconductor memory devices (e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and flash memory'- devices; magnetic disks, such as internal hard disks and removable disks; magneto- optical disks; Random Access Memory (RAM), and CD-ROM and DVD-ROM disks.
  • semiconductor memory devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
  • flash memory'- devices e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrical
  • Instructions 1324 may further be transmitted or received over a communications network 1326 using a transmission medium via the network interface device 1320 utilizing any one of a number of transfer protocols.
  • the network interface device 1320 may include one or more physical jacks (e.g., Ethernet, coaxial, or phonejacks) or one or more antennas to connect to the communications network 1326.
  • the network interface device 1320 may include a plurality of antennas to wirelessly communicate using at least one of single-input-multiple-output (SIMO), MIMO, or multiple- input-single-output (MISO) techniques.
  • SIMO single-input-multiple-output
  • MIMO multiple-input-multiple-output
  • MISO multiple- input-single-output
  • the network interface device 1320 may wirelessly communicate using Multiple User MIMO techniques.
  • transmission medium shall be taken to include any intangible medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions for execution by the communication device 1300, and includes digital or analog communications signals or another intangible medium to facilitate communication of such software.
  • a transmission medium in the context of this disclosure is a device-readable medium.
  • machine-readable medium means the same thing and may be used interchangeably in this disclosure.
  • the terms are defined to include both machine-storage media and transmission media.
  • the terms include both storage devices/media and carrier waves/modulated data signals.
  • Described implementations of the subject matter can include one or more features, alone or in combination as illustrated below by way of examples.
  • Example 1 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of di stributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and a Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
  • TA timing advance
  • Example 2 the subject matter of Example 1 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 3 the subject matter of Example 2 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 4 the subject matter of Example 3 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 5 the subject matter of Examples 3-4 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 6 the subject matter of Examples 1-5 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
  • Example 7 the subject matter of Example 6 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (M AC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • M AC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 8 the subject matter of Examples 6-7 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 9 the subject matter of Examples 1-8 includes, transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry; and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry.
  • Example 10 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (TAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent IAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
  • TA timing advance
  • Example 11 the subject matter of Example 10 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 12 the subject matter of Example 11 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 13 is a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of the distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network and to cause the parent IAB node to determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value.
  • IAB Integrated Access and Backhaul
  • Example 14 the subject matter of Example 13 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • the TA value is a TA offset
  • the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
  • Example 15 the subject matter of Example 14 includes, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
  • Example 16 the subject matter of Example 15 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 17 the subject matter of Examples 15-16 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 18 the subject matter of Examples 13-17 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
  • Example 19 the subject matter of Example 18 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • RAR random access response
  • Example 20 the subject matter of Examples 18-19 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • Example 21 is at least one machine-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, cause the processing circuitry to perform operations to implement any of Examples 1-20, [00261]
  • Example 22 is an apparatus comprising means to implement any of Examples 1-20.
  • Example 23 is a system to implement any of Examples 1 -20.
  • Example 24 is a method to implement any of Examples 1-20.

Abstract

An apparatus for a parent IAB node includes processing circuitry coupled to a memory. To configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to determine a timing advance (TA) value based on Rx propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node. Configuration signaling including the TA value is encoded for transmission to the IAB node. The processing circuitry causes simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node. The second data is received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, and the uplink transmission is associated with a timing advance based on the TA value.

Description

TIMING ADVANCE (TA) CONFIGURATIONS FOR LAB NETWORKS
PRIORITY CLAIM
[0001] This application claims the benefit of priority to United States Provisional Patent Application 63/104,811, filed October 23, 2020, and entitled “TIMING ADVANCE (TA) MECHANISMS TO SUPPORT SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS," which patent application is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0002] Aspects pertain to wireless communications. Some aspects relate to wireless networks including 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) networks, 3GPP LTE (Long Term Evolution) networks, 3GPP LTE-A (LTE Advanced) networks, (MulteFire, LTE-U), and fifth-generation (5G) networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc. Other aspects are directed to techniques for timing advance (TA) mechanisms including configuration to support simultaneous operations in IAB networks.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Mobile communications have evolved significantly from early voice systems to today's highly sophisticated integrated communication platform. With the increase in different types of devices communicating with various network devices, usage of 3GPP LTE systems has increased. The penetration of mobile devices (user equipment or UEs) in modern society has continued to drive demand for a wide variety of networked devices in many disparate environments. Fifth-generation (5G) wireless systems are forthcoming and are expected to enable even greater speed, connectivity, and usability. Next generation 5G networks (or NR networks) are expected to increase throughput, coverage, and robustness and reduce latency and operational and capital expenditures. 5G-NR networks will continue to evolve based on 3GPP LTE- Advanced with additional potential new radio access technologies (RATs) to enrich people's lives with seamless wireless connectivity solutions delivering fast, rich content and services. As current cellular network frequency is saturated, higher frequencies, such as millimeter wave (mmWave) frequency, can be beneficial due to their high bandwidth.
[0004] Potential LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum includes (and is not limited to) the LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum via dual connectivity (DC), or DC-based LAA, and the standalone LTE system in the unlicensed spectrum, according to which LTE-based technology solely operates in the unlicensed spectrum without requiring an “anchor” in the licensed spectrum, called MulteFire. Further enhanced operation of LTE and NR systems in the licensed, as well as unlicensed spectrum, is expected in future releases and 5G systems. Such enhanced operations can include techniques for supporting TA configurations in IAB networks.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
[0005] In the figures, which are not necessarily drawn to scale, like numerals may describe similar components in different views. Like numerals having different letter suffixes may represent different instances of similar components. The figures illustrate generally, by way of example, but not by way of limitation, various aspects discussed in the present document.
[0006] FIG. 1 A illustrates an architecture of a network, in accordance with some aspects.
[0007] FIG. IB and FIG. 1C illustrate a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
[0008] FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments.
[0009] FIG. 5 illustrates a reference diagram of an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
[0010] FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU) - distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
[0011] FIG. 7 illustrates IAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios, in accordance with some aspects.
[0012] FIG. 8 illustrates parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0013] FIG. 9 illustrates TAcase1/Tp/Tg relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
[0014] FIG. 10 illustrates Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments.
[0015] FIG. 11 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0016] FIG. 12 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0017] FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0018] The following description and the drawings sufficiently illustrate aspects to enable those skilled in the art to practice them. Other aspects may incorporate structural, logical, electrical, process, and other changes. Portions and features of some aspects may be included in or substituted for, those of other aspects. Aspects outlined in the claims encompass all available equivalents of those claims.
[0019] FIG. 1A illustrates an architecture of a network in accordance with some aspects. The network 140A is shown to include user equipment (UE)
101 and UE 102. The UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface. The UEs 101 and
102 can be collectively referred to herein as UE 101, and UE 101 can be used to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
[0020] Any of the radio links described herein (e.g., as used in the network 140 A or any other illustrated network) may operate according to any exemplary radio communication technology and/or standard.
[0021] LTE and LTE- Advanced are standards for wireless communications of high-speed data for UE such as mobile telephones. In LTE- Advanced and various wireless systems, carrier aggregation is a technology- according to which multiple carrier signals operating on different frequencies may be used to cany communications for a single UE, thus increasing the bandwidth available to a single device. In some aspects, carrier aggregation may- be used where one or more component carriers operate on unlicensed frequencies.
[0022] Aspects described herein can be used in the context of any spectrum management scheme including, for example, dedicated licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, (licensed) shared spectrum (such as Licensed Shared Access (LSA) in 2.3-2.4 GHz, 3.4-3.6 GHz, 3.6-3.8 GHz, and further frequencies and Spectrum Access System (SAS) m 3.55-3.7 GHz and further frequencies).
[0023] Aspects described herein can also be applied to different Single Carrier or OFDM flavors (CP-OFDM, SC-FDMA, SC-OFDM, filter bank-based multicarrier (FBMC), OFDMA, etc.) and in particular 3GPP NR (New Radio) by allocating the OFDM carrier data bit vectors to the corresponding symbol resources.
[0024] In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can comprise an Internet-of-Things (loT) UE or a Cellular loT (CIoT) UE, which can comprise a network access layer designed for low-power loT applications utilizing short- lived UE connections. In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include a narrowband (NB) loT UE (e.g., such as an enhanced NB-IoT (eNB-IoT) UE and Further Enhanced (FeNB-loT) UE). An loT UE can utilize technologies such as machine-to-machine (M2M) or machine-type communications (MTC) for exchanging data with an MTC server or device via a public land mobile network (PLMN), Proximity-Based Service (ProSe), or device-to-device (D2D) communication, sensor networks, or loT networks. The M2M or MTC exchange of data may be a machine-initiated exchange of data. An loT network includes interconnecting loT UEs, which may include uniquely identifiable embedded computing devices (within the Internet infrastructure), with short-lived connections. The loT UEs may execute background applications (e.g., keep- alive messages, status updates, etc.) to facilitate the connections of the loT network.
[0025] In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include enhanced MTC (eMTC) UEs or further enhanced MTC (FeMTC) UEs. [0026] The UEs 101 and 102 may be configured to connect, e.g., communicatively couple, with a radio access network (RAN) 110. The RAN 110 may be, for example, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), a NextGen RAN (NG RAN), or some other type of RAN. The UEs 101 and 102 utilize connections 103 and 104, respectively, each of which comprises a physical communications interface or layer (discussed in further detail below); in this example, the connections 103 and 104 are illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols, such as a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) protocol, a code-division multiple access (CDMA) network protocol, a Push-to-Talk (PTT) protocol, a PTT over Cellular (POC) protocol, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) protocol, a 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) protocol, a fifth-generation (5G) protocol, a New Radio (NR) protocol, and the like.
[0027] In an aspect, the UEs 101 and 102 may further directly exchange communication data via a ProSe interface 105. The ProSe interface 105 may alternatively be referred to as a sidelink interface comprising one or more logical channels, including but not limited to a Physical Sidelink Control Channel (PSCCH), a Physical Sidelink Shared Channel (PSSCH), a Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel (PSDCH), and a Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel (PSBCH).
[0028] The UE 102 is shown to be configured to access an access point (AP) 106 via connection 107. The connection 107 can comprise a local wireless connection, such as, for example, a connection consistent with any IEEE 802.11 protocol, according to which the AP 106 can comprise a wireless fidelity (WiFi®) router. In this example, the AP 106 is shown to be connected to the Internet without connecting to the core network of the wireless system (described in further detail below).
[0029] The RAN 110 can include one or more access nodes that, enable connections 103 and 104. These access nodes (ANs) can be referred to as base stations (BSs), NodeBs, evolved NodeBs (eNBs), Next Generation NodeBs (gNBs), RAN network nodes, and the like, and can comprise ground stations (e.g., terrestrial access points) or satellite stations providing coverage within a geographic area (e.g., a cell). In some aspects, the communication nodes 111 and 112 can be transmission/reception points (TRPs). In instances when the communication nodes 111 and 112 are NodeBs (e.g., eNBs or gNBs), one or more TRPs can function within the communication cell of the NodeBs. The RAN 110 may include one or more RAN nodes for providing macrocells, e.g., macro RAN node 111, and one or more RAN nodes for providing femtocells or picocells (e.g., cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells), e.g., low power (LP) RAN node 112 or an unlicensed spectrum based secondary RAN node 112.
[0030] Any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can terminate the air interface protocol and can be the first point of contact for the UEs 101 and 102. In some aspects, any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can fulfill various logical functions for the RAN 110 including, but not limited to, radio network controller (RNC) functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling, and mobility management. In an example, any of the nodes 111 and/or 112 can be a new generation Node-B (gNB), an evolved node-B (eNB), or another type of RAN node.
[0031] The RAN 110 is shown to be communicatively coupled to a core network (CN) 120 via an SI interface 113. In aspects, the CN 120 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) network, a NextGen Packet Core (NPC) network, or some other type of CN (e.g., as illustrated in reference to FIGS. 1B-1C). In this aspect, the SI interface 113 is split into two parts: the Sl-U interface 114, which carries user traffic data between the R AN nodes 111 and 112 and the serving gateway (S-GW) 122, and the SI -mobility management entity (MME) interface 115, which is a signaling interface between the RAN nodes 111 and 112 and MM I is 121.
[0032] In this aspect, the CN 120 comprises the MMEs 121, the S-GW 122, the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (P-GW) 123, and a home subscriber server (HSS) 124. The MMEs 121 may be similar in function to the control plane of legacy Serving General Packet Radio Sendee (GPRS) Support Nodes (SGSN). The MMEs 121 may manage mobility aspects in access such as gateway selection and tracking area list management. The HSS 124 may comprise a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions. The CN 120 may comprise one or several HSSs 124, depending on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment, on the organization of the network, etc. For example, the HSS 124 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/ addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc. [0033] The S-GW 122 may termmate the SI interface 113 towards the RAN 110, and route data packets between the RAN 110 and the CN 120. In addition, the S-GW 122 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities of the S-GW 122 may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
[0034] The P-GW 123 may terminate an SGi interface toward a PDN. The P-GW 123 may route data packets between the EPC network 120 and external networks such as a network including the application server 184 (alternatively referred to as application function (AT)) via an Internet Protocol (IP) interface 125. The P-GW 123 can also communicate data to other external networks 131 A, which can include the Internet, IP multimedia subsystem (IPS) network, and other networks. Generally, the application server 184 may be an element offering applications that use IP bearer resources with the core network (e.g., UMTS Packet Services (PS) domain, LTE PS data services, etc.). In this aspect, the P-GW 123 is shown to be communicatively coupled to an application server 184 via an IP interface 125. The application server 184 can also be configured to support one or more communication services (e.g., Voice-over- Internet Protocol (VoIP) sessions, PTT sessions, group communication sessions, social networking services, etc.) for the UEs 101 and 102 via the CN 120.
[0035] The P-GW 123 may further be a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection. Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) 126 is the policy and charging control element of the CN 120. In a non-roaming scenario, in some aspects, there may be a single PCRF in the Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) associated with a UE's Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session. In a roaming scenario with a local breakout of traffic, there may be two PCRFs associated with a UE's IP-CAN session: a Home PCRF (H-PCRF) within an HPLMN and a Visited PCRF (V-PCRF) within a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN). The PCRF 126 may be communicatively coupled to the application server 184 via the P-GW 123.
[0036] In some aspects, the communication network 140A can be an loT network or a 5G network, including a 5G new radio network using communications in the licensed (5G NR) and the unlicensed (5G NR-U) spectrum. One of the current enablers of loT is the narrowband-IoT (NB-IoT). [0037] An NG system architecture can include the RAN 110 and a 5G network core (5GC ) 120. The NG-RAN 110 can include a plurality of nodes, such as gNBs and NG-eNBs. The core network 120 (e.g., a 5G core network or 5GC) can include an access and mobility function (AMF) and/or a user plane function (UPF). The AMF and the UPF can be communicatively coupled to the gNBs and the NG-eNBs via NG interfaces. More specifically, in some aspects, the gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be connected to the AMF by NG-C interfaces, and to the UPF by NG-U interfaces. The gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be coupled to each other via Xn interfaces.
[0038] In some aspects, the NG system architecture can use reference points between various nodes as provided by 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 23.501 (e.g., V15.4.0, 2018-12). In some aspects, each of the gNBs and the NG- eNBs can be implemented as a base station, a mobile edge server, a small cell, a home eNB, a RAN network node, and so forth. In some aspects, a gNB can be a master node (MN) and NG-eNB can be a secondary node (SN) in a 5G architecture. In some aspects, the master/primary node may operate in a licensed band and the secondary node may operate in an unlicensed band.
[0039] FIG. IB illustrates a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects. Referring to FIG. IB, there is illustrated a 5G system architecture 140B in a reference point representation. More specifically, UE 102 can be in communication with ILAN 110 as well as one or more other 5G core (5GC) network entities. The 5G system architecture 140B includes a plurality of network functions (NFs), such as access and mobility management function (AMF) 132, location management function (LMF) 133, session management function (SMF) 136, policy control function (PCF) 148, application function (AF) 150, user plane function (UPF) 134, network slice selection function (NSSF) 142, authentication server function (AUSF) 144, and unified data management (UDM)/home subscriber server (HSS) 146. The UPF 134 can provide a connection to a data network (DN) 152, which can include, for example, operator services, Internet access, or third-party services. The AMF 132 can be used to manage access control and mobility and can also include network slice selection functionality. The SMF 136 can be configured to set up and manage various sessions according to network policy. The UPF 134 can be deployed in one or more configurations according to the desired service type. The PCF 148 can be configured to provide a policy framework using network slicing, mobility management, and roaming (similar to PCRF in a 4G communication system). The UDM can be configured to store subscriber profiles and data (similar to an HSS in a 4G communication system).
[0040] The LMF 133 may be used in connection with 5G positioning functionalities. In some aspects, LMF 133 receives measurements and assistance information from the next generation radio access network (NG- RAN) 110 and the mobile device (e.g., LIE 101) via the AMF 132 over the NLs interface to compute the position of the UE 101. In some aspects, NR positioning protocol A (NRPPa) may be used to carry the positioning information between NG-RAN and LMF 133 over a next generation control plane interface (NG-C). In some aspects, LMF 133 configures the UE using the LTE positioning protocol (LPP) via AMF 132. The NG RAN 110 configures the UE 101 using radio resource control (RRC) protocol over LTE-Uu and NR-Uu interfaces.
[0041] In some aspects, the 5G system architecture 140B configures different reference signals to enable positioning measurements. Example reference signals that mav be used for positioning measurements include the positioning reference signal (NR PRS) in the downlink and the sounding reference signal (SRS) for positioning in the uplink. The downlink positioning reference signal (PRS) is a reference signal configured to support downlink- based positioning methods.
[0042] In some aspects, the 5G system architecture 140B includes an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) 168B as wel l as a plurality of IP multimedia core network subsystem entities, such as call session control functions (CSCFs).
More specifically, the IMS 168B includes a CSCF, which can act as a proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) 162BE, a serving CSCF (S-CSCF) 164B, an emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) (not illustrated in FIG. IB), or interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) 166B. The P-CSCF 162B can be configured to be the first contact point for the UE 102 within the IM subsystem (IMS) 168B. The S-CSCF 164B can be configured to handle the session states in the network, and the E-CSCF can be configured to handle certain aspects of emergency sessions such as routing an emergency request to the correct emergency center or PSAP. The I-CSCF 166B can be configured to function as the contact point within an operator's network for all IMS connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber currently located within that network operators service area. In some aspects, the I-CSCF 166B can be connected to another IP multimedia network I70E, e.g. an IMS operated by a different network operator.
[0043] In some aspects, the UDM/HSS 146 can be coupled to an application server I60E, which can include a telephony application server (TAS) or another application server (AS). The AS 160B can be coupled to the IMS 168B via the S-CSCF 164B or the I-CSCF 166B.
[0044] A reference point representation shows that interaction can exist between corresponding NF sendees. For example, FIG. IB illustrates the following reference points: N1 (between the UE 102 and the AMF 132), N2 (between the RAN 110 and the AMF 132), N3 (between the RAN 110 and the UPF 134), N4 (between the SMF 136 and the UPF 134), N5 (between the PCF 148 and the AF 150, not shown), N6 (between the UPF 134 and the DN 152), N7 (between the SMF 136 and the PCF 148, not shown), N8 (between the UDM 146 and the AMF 132, not shown), N9 (between two UPFs 134, not shown), N10 (between the UDM 146 and the SMF 136, not shown), N11 (between the AMF 132 and the SMF 136, not shown), N12 (between the AUSF 144 and the AMF 132, not shown), N13 (between the AUSF 144 and the UDM 146, not shown), N14 (between two AMFs 132, not shown), N15 (between the PCF 148 and the AMF 132 in case of a non-roaming scenario, or between the PCF 148 and a visited network and AMF 132 in case of a roaming scenario, not shown), N16 (between two SMFs, not shown), and N22 (between AMF 132 and NSSF 142, not shown). Other reference point representations not shown in FIG. IB can also be used.
[0045] FIG. 1C illustrates a 5G system architecture 140C and a sendee- based representation. In addition to the network entities illustrated in FIG. IB, system architecture 140C can also include a network exposure function (NEF) 154 and a network repository function (NRF) 156. In some aspects, 5G system architectures can be service-based and interaction between network functions can be represented by corresponding point-to-point reference points Ni or as service-based interfaces.
[0046] In some aspects, as illustrated in FIG. 1C, service-based representations can be used to represent network functions within the control plane that enable other authorized network functions to access their services. In this regard, 5G system architecture 140C can include the following service- based interfaces: Namf 158H (a service-based interface exhibited by the AMF 132), Nsmf 1581 (a service-based interface exhibited by the SMF 136), Nnef 158B (a service-based interface exhibited by the NEF 154), Npcf 158D (a service-based interface exhibited by the PCF 148), a Nudm 158E (a service- based interface exhibited by the UDM 146), Naf 158F (a service-based interface exhibited by the AF 150), Nnrf 158C (a service-based interface exhibited by the NRF 156), Nnssf 158A (a service-based interface exhibited by the NSSF 142), Nausf 158G (a service-based interface exhibited by the AUSF 144). Other service-based interfaces (e.g., Nudr, N5g-eir, and Nudsf) not shown in FIG. 1C can also be used.
[0047] FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. 7 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments in different communication systems, such as 5G-NR networks including IAB networks. UEs, base stations (such as gNBs), and/or other nodes (e.g., any of the communication nodes in an IAB network) discussed in connection with FIGS. 1A-13 can be configured to perform the disclosed techniques.
[0048] FIG. 2 illustrates a network 200 in accordance with various embodiments. The network 200 may operate in a manner consistent with 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems. However, the example embodiments are not limited in this regard and the described embodiments may apply to other networks that benefit from the principles described herein, such as future 3GPP systems, or the like.
[0049] The network 200 may include a UE 202, which may include any mobile or non-mobile computing device designed to communicate with a RAN 204 via an over-the-air connection. The UE 202 may be, but is not limited to, a smartphone, tablet computer, wearable computing device, desktop computer, laptop computer, in-vehicle infotainment, in-car entertainment device, instrument cluster, head-up display device, onboard diagnostic device, dashtop mobile equipment, mobile data terminal, electronic engine management system, electronic/engine control unit, electronic/engine control module, embedded system, sensor, microcontroller, control module, engine management system, networked appliance, machine-type communication device, M2M or D2D device, loT device, etc.
[0050] In some embodiments, the network 200 may include a plurality of UEs coupled directly with one another via a sidelink interface. The UEs may be M2M/D2D devices that communicate using physical sidelink channels such as but not limited to, PSBCH, PSDCH, PSSCH, PSCCH, PSFCH, etc.
[0051] In some embodiments, the UE 202 may additionally communicate with an AP 206 via an over-the-air connection. The AP 206 may manage a WLAN connection, which may serve to offload some/all network traffic from the RAN 204. The connection between the UE 202 and the AP 206 may be consistent with any IEEE 802. 11 protocol, wherein the AP 206 could be a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi®) router. In some embodiments, the UE 202, RAN 204, and AP 206 may utilize cellular- WLAN aggregation (for example, LWA/LWIP). Cellular-WLAN aggregation may involve the UE 202 being configured by the RAN 204 to utilize both cellular radio resources and WLAN resources.
[0052] The RAN 204 may include one or more access nodes, for example, access node (AN) 208. AN 208 may terminate air-interface protocols for the UE 202 by providing access stratum protocols including RRC, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), Radio Link Control (RLC), MAC, and LI protocols. In this manner, the AN 208 may enable data/voice connectivity between the core network (CN) 220 and the UE 202. In some embodiments, the AN 208 may be implemented in a discrete device or as one or more software entities miming on server computers as part of, for example, a virtual network, which may be referred to as a CRAN or virtual baseband unit pool. The AN 208 be referred to as a BS, gNB, RAN node, eNB, ng-eNB, NodeB, RSU, TRxP, TRP, etc. The AN 208 may be a macrocell base station or a low-power base station for providing femtocells, picocells, or other like cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells.
[0053] In embodiments in which the RAN 204 includes a plurality of ANs, they may be coupled with one another via an X2 interface (if the RAN 204 is an LTE RAN) or an Xn interface (if the RAN 204 is a 5(3- RAN). The X2/Xn interfaces, which may be separated into control/user plane interfaces in some embodiments, may allow the ANs to communicate information related to handovers, data/context transfers, mobility, load management, interference coordination, etc.
[0054] The ANs of the RAN 204 may each manage one or more cells, cell groups, component carriers, etc. to provide the UE 202 with an air interface for network access. The UE 202 may be simultaneously connected with a plurality of cells provided by the same or different ANs of the RAN 204. For example, the UE 202 and RAN 204 may use carrier aggregation to allow the UE 202 to connect with a plurality of component carriers, each corresponding to a Pcell or Scell. In dual connectivity scenarios, a first AN may be a master node that provides an MCG and a second AN may be a secondary node that provides an SCG. The first/second ANs may be any combination of eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, etc.
[0055] The RAN 204 may provide the air interface over a licensed spectrum or an unlicensed spectrum. To operate in the unlicensed spectrum, the nodes may use LAA, eLAA, and/or feLAA mechanisms based on CA technology with PCells/Scells. Before accessing the unlicensed spectrum, the nodes may perform medium/carrier-sensing operations based on, for example, a listen-before-talk (LBT) protocol.
[0056] In V2X scenarios, the UE 202 or AN 208 may be or act as a roadside unit (RSU), which may refer to any transportation infrastructure entity used for V2X communications. An RSU may be implemented in or by a suitable AN or a stationary (or relatively stationary) UE. An RSU implemented in or by: a UE may be referred to as a “UE-type RSU”; an eNB may be referred to as an “eNB-type RSU”, a gNB may be referred to as a “gNB-type RSU”; and the like. In one example, an RSU is a computing device coupled with radio frequency circuitry located on a roadside that provides connectivity support to passing vehicle UEs. The RSU may also include internal data storage circuitry' to store intersection map geometry, traffic statistics, media, as well as applications/ software to sense and control ongoing vehicular and pedestrian traffic. The RSU may provide very low latency communications required for high-speed events, such as crash avoidance, traffic warnings, and the like. Additionally, or alternatively, the RSU may provide other cellular/WLAN communications services. The components of the RSU may be packaged in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for outdoor installation and may include a network interface controller to provide a wired connection (e.g., Ethernet) to a traffic signal controller or a backhaul network.
[0057] In some embodiments, the RAN 204 may be an LTE RAN 210 with eNBs, for example, eNB 212. The LTE RAN 210 may provide an LTE air interface with the following characteristics: sub-carrier spacing (SCS) of 15 kHz; CP-OFDM waveform for downlink (DL) and SC-FDMA waveform for uplink (UL); turbo codes for data and TBCC for control; etc. The LTE air interface may rely on CSI-RS for CSI acquisition and beam management;
PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS for PDSCH/PDCCH demodulation; and CRS for cell search and initial acquisition, channel quality measurements, and channel estimation for coherent demodulation/detection at the UE. The LTE air interface may operate on sub-6 GHz bands.
[0058] In some embodiments, the RAN 204 may be an NG-RAN 214 with gNBs, for example, gNB 216, or ng-eNBs, for example, ng-eNB 218. The gNB 216 may connect with 5G-enab1ed UEs using a 5G NR interface. The gNB 216 may connect with a 5G core through an NG interface, which may include an N2 interface or an N3 interface. The ng-eNB 218 may also connect with the 5G core through an NG interface but. may connect with a UE via an LTE air interface. The gNB 216 and the ng-eNB 218 may connect over an Xn interface.
[0059] In some embodiments, the NG interface may be split into two parts, an NG user plane (NG-U) interface, which carries traffic data between the nodes of the NG-RAN 214 and a UPF 248 (e.g., N3 interface), and an NG control plane (NG-C) interface, which is a signaling interface between the nodes of the NG-RAN214 and an AMF 244 (e.g., N2 interface). [0060] The NG-RAN 214 may provide a 5G-NR air interface with the following characteristics: variable SCS; CP-OFDM for DL, CP-OFDM and DFT-s-OFDM for UL, polar, repetition, simplex, and Reed-Muller codes for control and LDPC for data. The 5G-NR air interface may rely on CSI-RS, PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS similar to the LTE air interface. The 5G-NR air interface may not use a CRS but may use PBCH DMRS for PBCH demodulation; PTRS for phase tracking for PDSCH and tracking reference signal for time tracking. The 5G-NR air interface may operate on FR1 bands that include sub-6 GHz bands or FR2 bands that include bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz. The 5G-NR air interface may include a synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) block (SSB ) that is an area of a downlink resource grid that includes PSS/SSS/PBCH.
[0061] In some embodiments, the 5G-NR air interface may utilize BWPs (bandwidth parts) for various purposes. For example, BWP can be used for dynamic adaptation of the SCS. For example, the UE 202 can be configured with multiple BWPs where each BWP configuration has a different SCS. When a BWP change is indicated to the UE 202, the SCS of the transmission is changed as well. Another use case example of BWP is related to power saving. In particular, multiple BWPs can be configured for the UE 202 with different amounts of frequency resources (for example, PRBs) to support data transmission under different traffic loading scenarios. A BWP containing a smaller number of PRBs can be used for data transmission with a small traffic load while allowing power saving at the UE 202 and in some cases at the gNB 216. A BWP containing a larger number of PRBs can be used for scenarios with higher traffic loads.
[0062] The RAN 204 is communicatively coupled to CN 220 that includes network elements to provide various functions to support data and telecommunications services to customers/subscribers (for example, users of UE 202). The components of the CN 220 may be implemented in one physical node or separate physical nodes. In some embodiments, NFV may be utilized to virtualize any or all of the functions provided by the network elements of the CN 220 onto physical compute/storage resources in seivers, switches, etc. A logical instantiation of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network slice, and a logical instantiation of a portion of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network sub- slice.
[0063] In some embodiments, the CN 220 may be connected to the LTE radio network as part of the Enhanced Packet System (EPS) 222, which may also be referred to as an EPC (or enhanced packet core). The EPC 222 may include MME 224, SGW 226, SGSN 228, HSS 230, PGW 232, and PCRF 234 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the EPC 222 may be briefly introduced as follows.
[0064] The MME 224 may implement mobility management functions to track the current location of the UE 202 to facilitate paging, bearer activation/deactivation, handovers, gateway selection, authentication, etc.
[0065] The SGW 226 may terminate an SI interface toward the RAN and route data packets between the RAN and the EPC 222. The SGW 226 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
[0066] The SGSN 228 may track the location of the UE 202 and perform security functions and access control. In addition, the SGSN 228 may perform inter-EPC node signaling for mobility between different RAT networks; PDN and S-GW selection as specified by MME 224; MME selection for handovers, etc. The S3 reference point between the MME 224 and the SGSN 228 may enable user and bearer information exchange for inter-3 GPP access network mobility in idle/active states.
[0067] The HSS 230 may include a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions. The HSS 230 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc. An S6a reference point between the HSS 230 and the MME 224 may enable the transfer of subscription and authentication data for authenticating/authorizing user access to the LTE CN 220.
[0068] The PGW 232 may terminate an SGi interface toward a data network (DN) 236 that may include an application/ content server 238. The PGW 232 may route data packets between the LTE CN 220 and the data network 236. The PGW 232 may be coupled with the SGW 226 by an S5 reference point to facilitate user plane tunneling and tunnel management. The PGW 232 may further include a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection (for example, PCEF). Additionally, the SGi reference point between the PGW 232 and the data network 236 may be an operator external public, a private PDN, or an intra-operator packet data network, for example, for provision of IMS services. The PGW 232 may be coupled with a PCRF 234 via a Gx reference point.
[0069| The PCRF 234 is the policy and charging control element of the LTE CN 220. The PCRF 234 may be communicatively coupled to the app/content server 238 to determine appropriate QoS and charging parameters for service flows. The PCRF 234 may provision associated rules into a PCEF (via Gx reference point) with appropriate ITT and QCI.
[0070] In some embodiments, the CN 220 may be a 5GC 240. The 5GC 240 may include an AUSF 242, AMF 244, SMF 246, UPF 248, NSSF 250, NEF 252, NRF 254, PCF 256, UDM 258, and AF 260 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the 5GC 240 may be briefly introduced as follows.
[0071] The AUSF 242 may store data for authentication of UE 202 and handle authentication -related functionality. The AUSF 242 may facilitate a common authentication framework for various access types. In addition to communicating with other elements of the 5GC 240 over reference points as shown, the AUSF 242 may exhibit a Nausf service-based interface.
[0072] The AMF 244 may allow other functions of the 5GC 240 to communicate with the UE 202 and the RAN 204 and to subscribe to notifications about mobility events with respect to the UE 202. The AMF 244 may be responsible for registration management (for example, for registering UE 202), connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception of AMF -related events, and access authentication and authorization. The AMF 244 may provide transport for SM messages between the UE 202 and the SMF 246, and act as a transparent proxy for routing SM messages. AMF 244 may also provide transport for SMS messages between UE 202 and an SMSF. AMF 244 may interact with the AUSF 242 and the UE 202 to perform various security anchor and context management functions. Furthermore, AMF 244 may be a termination point of a RAN CP interface, which may include or be an N2 reference point between the RAN 204 and the AMF 244; and the AMF 244 may be a termination point of NAS (Nl) signaling, and perform NAS ciphering and integrity protection. AMF 244 may also support NAS signaling with the UE 202 over an N3 IWF interface.
[0073] The SMF 246 may be responsible for SM (for example, session establishment, tunnel management between UPF 248 and AN 208); UE IP address allocation and management (including optional authorization); selection and control of UP function, confi guring traffic steering at UPF 248 to route traffic to proper destination; termination of interfaces toward policy control functions; controlling part of policy enforcement, charging, and QoS; lawful intercept (for SM^ events and interface to LI sy stem); termination of SM: parts of NAS messages; downlink data notification; initiating AN specific SM information, sent via AMF 244 over N2 to AN 208; and determining SSC mode of a session. SM may refer to the management of a PDU session, and a PDU session or “session” may refer to a PDU connectivity service that provides or enables the exchange of PDUs between the UE 202 and the data network 236.
[0074] The UPF 248 may act as an anchor point for intra-RAT and inter- RAT mobility, an external PDU session point of interconnecting to data network 236, and a branching point to support multi-homed PDU sessions. The UPF 248 may also perform packet routing and forwarding, perform packet inspection, enforce the user plane part of policy rules, lawfully intercept packets (UP collection), perform traffic usage reporting, perform QoS handling for a user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, UL/DL rate enforcement), perform uplink traffic verification (e.g., SDF-to-QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, and perform downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering. UPF 248 may include an uplink classifier to support routing traffic flows to a data network.
[0075] The NSSF 250 may select a set of network slice instances serving the UE 202. The NSSF 250 may also determine allowed NSSAI and the mapping to the subscribed S-NSSAIs if needed. The NSSF 250 may also determine the AMF set to be used to serve the UE 202, or a list of candidate AMFs based on a suitable configuration and possibly by querying the NRF 254. The selection of a set of network slice instances for the UE 202 may be triggered by the AMF 244 with which the UE 202 is registered by interacting with the NSSF 250, which may lead to a change of AMF. The NSSF 250 may interact with the AMF 244 via an N22 reference point, and may communicate with another NSSF in a visited network via an N31 reference point (not shown). Additionally, the NSSF 250 may exhibit an Nnssf service-based interface.
[0076] The NEF 252 may securely expose services and capabilities provided by 3 GPP network functions for the third party, internal exposure/re- exposure, AFs (e.g., AF 260), edge computing or fog computing systems, etc. In such embodiments, the NEF 252 may authenticate, authorize, or throttle the AFs. NEF 252 may also translate information exchanged with the AF 260 and information exchanged with internal network functions. For example, the NEF 252 may translate between an AF-Service-Identifier and an internal 5GC information. NEF 252 may also receive information from other NFs based on the exposed capabilities of other NFs. This information may be stored at the NEF 252 as structured data, or a data storage NF using standardized interfaces. The stored information can then be re-exposed by the NEF 252 to other NFs and AFs, or used for other purposes such as analytics. Additionally, the NEF 252 may exhibit a Nnef service-based interface.
[0077] The NRF 254 may support service discovery' functions, receive NF discovery requests from NF instances, and provide the information of the discovered NF instances to the NF instances. NRF 254 also maintains information on available NF instances and their supported services. As used herein, the terms “instantiate,” “instantiation,” and the like may refer to the creation of an instance, and an “instance” may refer to a concrete occurrence of an object, which may occur, for example, during the execution of program code. Additionally, the NRF 254 may exhibit the Nnrf service-based interface.
[0078] The PCF 256 may provide policy rules to control plane functions to enforce them, and may also support a unified policy framework to govern network behavior. The PCF 256 may also implement a front end to access subscription information relevant for policy decisions in a UDR of the UDM 258. In addition to communicating with functions over reference points as shown, the PCF 256 exhibits an Npcf service-based interface.
[0079] The UDM 258 may handle subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions and may store the subscription data of LIE 202. For example, subscription data may be communicated via an N8 reference point between the UDM 258 and the AMF 244. The UDM 258 may include two parts, an application front end, and a user data repository (UDR) (not illustrated in FIG. 2). The UDR may store subscription data and policy data for the UDM 258 and the PCF 256, and/or structured data for exposure and application data (including PFDs for application detection, application request information for multiple UEs 202) for the NEF 252. A Nudr service-based interface may be exhibited by the UDR to allow the UDM 258, PCF 256, and NEF 252 to access a particular set of the stored data, as well as to read, update (e.g., add, modify), delete, and subscribe to the notification of relevant data changes in the UDR. The UDM: may include a UDM-FE, which is in charge of processing credentials, location management, subscription management, and so on. Several different front ends may serve the same user in different transactions. The UDM-FE accesses subscription information stored in the UDR and performs authentication credential processing, user identification handling, access authorization, registration/mobility management, and subscription management. In addition to communicating with other NFs over reference points as shown, the UDM 258 may exhibit the Nudm service-based interface.
[0080] The AF 260 may provide application influence on traffic routing, provide access to NEF, and interact with the policy framework for policy control.
[0081] In some embodiments, the 5GC 240 may enable edge computing by selecting operator/3rd party services to be geographically close to a point that the UE 202 is attached to the network. This may reduce latency and load on the network. To provide edge-computing implementations, the 5GC 240 may select a UPF 248 close to the UE 202 and execute traffic steering from the UPF 248 to data network 236 via the N6 interface. This may be based on the UE subscription data, UE location, and information provided by the AF 260. In this way, the AF 260 may influence UPF (re)selection and traffic routing. Based on operator deployment, when AF 260 is considered to be a trusted entity, the network operator may permit AF 260 to interact directly with relevant NFs. Additionally, the AF 260 may exhibit a Naf service-based interface.
[0082] The data network 236 may represent various network operator sendees, Internet access, or third-party services that may be provided by one or more servers including, for example, application/ content server 238.
[0083] FIG. 3 schematically illustrates a wireless network 300 in accordance with various embodiments. The wireless network 300 may include a UE 302 in wireless communication with AN 304. The UE 302 and AN 304 may be similar to, and substantially interchangeable with, like-named components described elsewhere herein.
[0084] The UE 302 may be communicatively coupled with the AN 304 via connection 306. The connection 306 is illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols such as an LTE protocol or a 5G NR protocol operating at mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies.
[0085] The UE 302 may include a host platform 308 coupled with a modem platform 310. The host platform 308 may include application processing circuitry 312, which may be coupled with protocol processing circuitry 314 of the modem platform 310. The application processing circuitry' 312 may run various applications for the UE 302 that source/sink application data. The application processing circuitry 312 may further implement one or more layer operations to transmit/receive application data to/from a data network. These layer operations may include transport (for example UDP) and Internet (for example, IP) operations
[0086] The protocol processing circuitry 314 may implement one or more layer operations to facilitate transmission or reception of data over the connection 306. The layer operations implemented by the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include, for example, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, and NAS operations.
[0087] The modem platform 310 may further include digital baseband circuitry 316 that may implement one or more layer operations that are “below” layer operations performed by the protocol processing circuitry 314 m a network protocol stack. These operations may include, for example, PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding, which may include one or more of space-time, space- frequency or spatial coding, reference signal generation/detection, preamble sequence generation and/or decoding, synchronization sequence generation/detection, control channel signal blind decoding, and other related functions.
[0088] The modem platform 310 may further include transmit circuitry' 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, and RF front end (RFFE) 324, which may include or connect to one or more antenna panels 326. Briefly, the transmit circuitry 318 may include a digital-to-analog converter, mixer, intermediate frequency (IF) components, etc.; the receive circuitry 320 may include an analog-to-digital converter, mixer, IF components, etc.; the RF circuitry 322 may include a low-noise amplifier, a power amplifier, power tracking components, etc.; RFFE 324 may include filters (for example, surface/bulk acoustic wave filters), switches, antenna tuners, beamforming components (for example, phase-array antenna components), etc. The selection and arrangement of the components of the transmit circuitry 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326 (referred generically as “transmit/receive components”) may be specific to details of a specific implementation such as, for example, whether the communication is TDM or I DM, in mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies, etc. In some embodiments, the transmit/receive components may be arranged in multiple parallel transmit/receive chains, may be disposed of in the same or different chips/modules, etc.
[0089] In some embodiments, the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include one or more instances of control circuitry (not shown) to provide control functions for the transmit/receive components.
[0090] A UE reception may be established by and via the antenna panels 326, RFFE 324, RF circuitry 322, receive circuitry 320, digital baseband circuitry 316, and protocol processing circuitry 314. In some embodiments, the antenna panels 326 may receive a transmission from the AN 304 by receive- beamforming signals received by a plurality of antennas/ antenna elements of the one or more antenna panels 326.
[0091] A UE transmission may be established by and via the protocol processing circuitry 314, digital baseband circuitry 316, transmit circuitry 318, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326. In some embodiments, the transmit components of the UE 302 may apply a spatial filter to the data to be transmitted to form a transmit beam emitted by the antenna elements of the antenna panels 326.
[0092] Similar to the UE 302, the AN 304 may include a host platform 328 coupled with a modem platform 330. The host platform 328 may include application processing circuitry 332 coupled with protocol processing circuitry 334 of the modem platform 330. The modem platform may further include digital baseband circuitry 336, transmit circuitry 338, receive circuitry 340, RF circuitry 342, RFFE circuitry 344, and antenna panels 346. The components of the AN 304 may be similar to and substantially interchangeable with like-named components of the UE 302. In addition to performing data transmission/reception as described above, the components of the AN 304 may perform various logical functions that include, for example, RNC functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling.
[0093] FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating components, according to some example embodiments, able to read instructions from a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (e.g., a non-transitory machine-readable storage medium) and perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein. Specifically, FIG. 4 shows a diagrammatic representation of hardware resources 400 including one or more processors (or processor cores) 410, one or more memory, ''storage devices 420, and one or more communication resources 430, each of which may be communicatively coupled via a bus 440 or other interface circuitry. For embodiments where node virtualization (e.g,, NFV) is utilized, a hypervisor 402 may be executed to provide an execution environment for one or more network slices/ sub-slices to utilize the hardware resources 400. [0094] The processors 410 may include, for example, a processor 412 and a processor 414. The processors 410 may be, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), a reduced instruction set computing (RISC) processor, a complex instruction set computing (CISC) processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), a DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
[0095] The memory/storage devices 420 may include a main memory, disk storage, or any suitable combination thereof. The memory/storage devices 420 may include but are not limited to, any type of volatile, non-volatile, or semi-volatile memory such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM ), static random access memory (SRAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), Flash memory, solid-state storage, etc.
[0096] The communication resources 430 may include interconnection or network interface controllers, components, or other suitable devices to communicate with one or more peripheral devices 404 or one or more databases 406 or other network elements via a network 408. For example, the communication resources 430 may include wired communication components (e.g., for coupling via USB, Ethernet, etc.), cellular communication components, NFC components, Bluetooth® (or Bluetooth® Low Energy) components, Wi- Fi® components, and other communication components.
[0097] Instructions 450 may comprise software, a program, an application, an applet, an app, or other executable code for causing at least any of the processors 410 to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein. The instructions 450 may reside, completely or partially, within at least one of the processors 410 (e.g., within the processor's cache memory), the memory/storage devices 420, or any suitable combination thereof. Furthermore, any portion of the instructions 450 may be transferred to the hardware resources 400 from any combination of the peripheral devices 404 or the databases 406. Accordingly, the memory of processors 410, the memory/storage devices 420, the peripheral devices 404, and the databases 406 are examples of computer-readable and machine-readable media. [0098] For one or more embodiments, at least one of the components outlined in one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to perform one or more operations, techniques, processes, and/or methods as outlined in the example sections below. For example, baseband circuitry associated with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below. For another example, circuitry associated with a UE, base station, satellite, network element, etc. as described above in connection with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below in the example section.
[0099] The term “application''' may refer to a complete and deployable package, environment to achieve a certain function in an operational environment. The term “AI/ML application” or the like may be an application that contains some artificial intelligence (AI)/machine learning (ML) models and application -level descriptions. In some embodiments, an AI/ML application may be used for configuring or implementing one or more of the disclosed aspects.
[00100] The term “machine learning” or “ML” refers to the use of computer systems implementing algorithms and/or statistical models to perform a specific task(s) without using explicit instructions but instead relying on patterns and inferences. ML algorithms build or estimate mathematical model(s) (referred to as “ML models” or the like) based on sample data (referred to as “training data,” “model training information,” or the like) to make predictions or decisions without being explicitly programmed to perform such tasks.
Generally, an ML algorithm is a computer program that learns from experience with respect to some task and some performance measure, and an ML model may be any object or data structure created after an ML algorithm is trained with one or more training datasets. After training, an ML model may be used to make predictions on new datasets. Although the term “ML algorithm” refers to different concepts than the term “ML model,” these terms as discussed herein may be used interchangeably for the present disclosure.
[00101] The term “machine learning model,” “ML model,” or the like may also refer to ML methods and concepts used by an ML-assisted solution. An “ML-assisted solution” is a solution that addresses a specific use case using ML algorithms during operation. ML models include supervised learning (e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.) unsupervised learning (e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.), reinforcement learning (e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit learning, deep RL, etc.), neural networks, and the like. Depending on the implementation a specific ML model could have many sub-models as components and the ML model may train all sub-models together. Separately trained ML models can also be chained together in an ML pipeline during inference. An “ML pipeline” is a set of functionalities, functions, or functional entities specific for an ML-assisted solution, an ML. pipeline may include one or several data sources in a data pipeline, a model training pipeline, a model evaluation pipeline, and an actor.
The “actor” is an entity that hosts an ML-assisted solution using the output of the ML model inference). The term “ML training host” refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the training of the model. The term “ML inference host” refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the model during inference mode (which includes both the model execution as well as any online learning if applicable). The ML-host informs the actor about the output of the ML algorithm, and the actor decides for an action (an “action” is performed by an actor as a result of the output of an ML-assisted solution). The term “model inference information” refers to information used as an input to the ML model for determining inference(s); the data used to train an ML model and the data used to determine inferences may overlap, however, “training data” and “inference data” refer to different concepts.
[00102] The disclosed techniques introduce TPC for a distributed unit (DU) command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes: [00103] (a) UL TPC for DU: UL TPC command from an IAB mobile termination (MT) to a parent DU to indicate parent DU's DL TX power adjustment; and
[00104] (b) DL. TPC for DU: DL. TPC command from a parent DU to an
IAB MT to indicate the co-located DU's DL TX power adjustment. [00105] In some aspects associated with MT RX/DU RX simultaneous operation, the received signal at an LAB DU may have interference coming from a co-located MT's DL reception (parent DU's DL transmission). There are no DL power control schemes in current IAB specifications for an IAB MT or a UE to inform its parent to adjust its DL power control. Only UL power control schemes exist including DL transmit power control (TPC) command from parent DU to an IAB MT or a UE to adjust its UL transmission power. Hence, besides DL TPC for MT, a UL TPC command for the DU to indicate to parent DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a UL TPC for DU command.
[00106] In some aspects associated with MT TX/DU TX simultaneous operation, the received signal at the parent DU may have interference coming from the DU's DL transmission. With UL power control mechanisms, a parent DU can send dynamic DL transmit power control (TPC) command for the MT to increase its UL transmission power. However, the UL transmission power is limited by the MT's capability and may not fully resolve this issue. Hence, besides DL TPC for MT, DL TPC command for DU from parent DU to an IAB MT to indicate the co-located IAB DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a DL. TPC for DU command.
[00107] The disclosed techniques introduce a TPC command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes, namely and as mentioned above, UL TPC for DU and DL TPC for DU . The TPC for DU command field and UL/DL signaling options may be used to cany the TPC for DU command. [00108] As illustrated in FIGS. 5-6, in an IAB network, an IAB node can connect to its parent node (an IAB donor or another IAB node) through a parent backhaul (BH) link, connect to a child user equipment (UE) through a child access (AC) link, and connect to a child IAB node through a child BH link.
[00109] FIG. 5 show's a reference diagram for IAB in a standalone mode, which contains one IAB donor node 503 and multiple IAB nodes (e.g., 514, 516, 518, 522, and 524). Referring to FIG. 5, the IAB architecture 500 can include a core network (CN) 502 coupled to an IAB donor node 503. The IAB donor node 503 can include control unit control plane (CU-CP) function 504, control unit user plane (CU-UP) function 506, other functions 508, and distributed unit (DU) functions 510 and 512. The DU function 510 can be coupled via wireless backhaul links to IAB nodes 514 and 516. The DU function 512 is coupled via a wireless backhaul link to TAB node 518. TAB node 514 is coupled to a UE 520 via a wireless access link, and IAB node 516 is coupled to IAB nodes 522 and 524. The IAB node 522 is coupled to UE 528 via a wireless access link. The IAB node 518 is coupled to UE 526 via a wireless access link.
[00110] Each of the IAB nodes illustrated in FIG. 5 can include a mobile termination (MT) function and a DU function. The MI' function can be defined as a component of the mobile equipment and can be referred to as a function residing on an IAB node that terminates the radio interface layers of the backhaul Uu interface toward the IAB donor or other IAB nodes.
[00111] The IAB donor 503 is treated as a single logical node that comprises a set of functions such as gNB-DU, gNB-CU-CP 504, gNB-CU-UP 506, and potentially other functions 508. In deployment, the IAB donor 503 can be split according to these functions, which can all be either collocated or non- collocated as allowed by 3GPP NG-RAN architecture. JAB-related aspects may arise when such a split is exercised. In some aspects, some of the functions presently associated with the IAB donor may eventually be moved outside of the donor in case it becomes evident that they do not perform lAB-specific tasks.
[00112] FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU)-distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an LAB architecture 600, in accordance with some aspects. Referring to FIG. 6, the IAB architecture 600 includes an IAB donor 601, a parent IAB node 603, an IAB node 605, a child IAB node 607, and a child UE 609. The IAB donor 601 includes a CU function 602 and a DU function 604. The parent IAB node 603 includes a parent MT (P-MT) function 606 and a parent DU (P-DU) function 608. The IAB node 605 includes an MT function 610 and a DU function 612. The child IAB node 607 includes a child MT (C- MT) function 614 and a child DU (C-DU) function 616.
[00113] As illustrated in FIG. 6, RRC signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the MT functions 606, 610, and 614, as well as between the CU function 602 and the child UE (C-UE) 609. Additionally, Fl access protocol (F1AP) signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the DU functions of the parent LAB node 603 and the IAB node 605.
[00114] As illustrated in FIGS. 5-6, multiple IAB nodes are connected to a donor node (DN) via a wireless backhaul. A DN or a parent LAB node needs to properly allocate resources for its child IAB node under the half-duplex constraint at the child IAB node. In some aspects, the time-frequency resource allocated to the parent link may be orthogonal to the time-frequency resource allocated to the child or access link.
[00115] In an example LAB network architectures (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6), CU/DU split has been leveraged where each IAB node holds a DU and an MT function. Via the MI' function, the LAB node connects to its parent LAB node or the lAB-donor like a UE. Via the DU function, the IAB node communicates with its child UEs and child MTs like a base station. In some aspects, RRC signaling is used between the CU in the LAB donor and the UE/MT, while Fl AP signaling is used between the CU and the DU in an IAB node.
[00116] FIG. 6 illustrates an example of the IAB CU/DU split architecture and signaling, w'here MT and DU in a parent LAB node are indicated as P-MT/P- DU, and MT and DU in a child IAB node are indicated as C-MT/C-DU, and a child UE is indicated as C-UE.
[00117] In some embodiments, a TDM -based DU function and an MT function may be supported within an IAB node. Extended IAB functionalities include duplexing enhancements to increase spectral efficiency and reduce latency through the support of SDM/FDM-based resource management, through simultaneous transmissions, and/or reception on lAB-nodes.
[00118] FIG. 7 illustrates LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios 700, in accordance with some aspects. In some embodiments, simultaneous operation (transmission and/or reception) of lAB-node's child and parent links includes four cases as below (illustrated in FIG. 7):
[00119] (a) MT TX/DU TX
[00120] (b) MT RX/DU RX
[00121] (c) MT TX/DU RX [00122] (d) MT RX /DU TX
[00123] In some embodiments, if LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission is allowed, there will be additional power control demands other than LIL power control. For example, in FIG. 7 case (b), an IAB MT function is received from its parent DU and the co-located DU is received from its child. Since DL transmission usually has higher equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) than the UL transmission, there will be a high chance that MT received power will be much higher than the co-located DU received power (un-balanced receiving power), which will cause high interference. Since UL transmission power is limited by the LIE/MT capability, UL. power control in the current specification may not fully solve this issue. Hence, DL power control (MT informs its parent DU to adjust its DL transmission power) is needed for IAB backhaul.
[00124] In some aspects, to support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset (different Cases associated with an IAB network are listed below). The disclosed techniques include two TA mechanisms to support simultaneous operations:
[00125] (a) Mechanism 1 : Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced; and [00126] Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case#l TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
[00127] Current TA mechanisms in IAB specifications use Case #1 timing where all IAB DU's DL. TX timings are aligned. An IAB node will calculate its DL TX timing based on Case #1 TA. To support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset. An additional drawback of the current TA mechanism is that it does not apply for simultaneous operations.
[00128] In some aspects, for lAB-node synchronization and timing alignment, the following cases of transmission timing alignment across IAB- nodes and lAB-donors may be considered: [00129] (a) Case #1: DL transmission timing alignment across lAB-nodes and lAB-donors:
[00130] (a.l) If DL TX and UL RX are not well aligned at the parent node, additional information about the alignment is needed for the child node to properly set its DL TX timing for OTA-based timing & synchronization.
[00131] (b) Case #2: DL and UL transmission timing is aligned within an
IAB node;
[00132] (c) Case #3: DL and UL reception timing is aligned within an
IAB node;
[00133] (d) Case #4: within an lAB-node, when transmitting using case 2 while when receiving using case 3;
[00134] (e) Case #5: Case #1 for access link timing and Case 4 for backhaul link timing within an lAB-node in different time slots;
[00135] (f) Case #6 (Case #1 DL transmission timing + Case #2 UL transmission timing):
[00136] (f.1 ) The DL transmission timing for all LAB-nodes has aligned with the parent lAB-node or donor DL timing;
[00137] (f.2) The UL transmission timing of an lAB-node can be aligned with the JAB-node's DL transmission timing.
[00138] (g) Case #7 (Case #1 DL transmission timing + Case #3 UL reception timing):
[00139] (g.1 ) The DL transmission timing for all lAB-nodes has aligned with the parent lAB-node or donor DL timing;
[00140] (g.2) The UL reception timing of an l AB-node can be aligned with the lAB-node's DL reception timing;
[00141] (g.3) If DL TX and UL RX are not well aligned at the parent node, additional information about the alignment is needed for the child node to properly set its DL TX timing for OTA-based timing & synchronization.
[00142] In some aspects, Case #1 is supported for both access and backhaul link transmission timing alignment and applied to Rel-16 LAB. Case #2 - Case #5 are not supported for IAB. In some embodiments, the disclosed techniques may be based on the following timing alignment considerations: [00143] (a) Case #7 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #2 (simultaneous MT-Rx/DU-Rx).
[00144] (b) Case #6 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #1 (simultaneous MT-Tx/DU-Tx). [00145] (c) In some aspects, Case #7 timing is supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #4 (simultaneous MT- Tx/DU-Rx).
[00146] Timing relationships for different simultaneous operations are discussed herein. For simultaneous MT-RXZDU-TX, since parent DU TX timing and DU TX timing cannot be changed, the timing relationship follows current Case #1 timing and is not discussed.
Simultaneous MT-RX/DU-RX with Case #7 Timing
[00147] FIG. 8 illustrates diagram 800 of parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[00148] In FIG, 8, there is illustrated the timing relationship with Case #7 timing for simultaneous parent-MT RX/parent-DU RX operation at a parent LAB node.
[00149] FIG. 9 illustrates a diagram 900 of TA case1/Tp/Tg relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
[00150] The parent-MT RX timing at the parent IAB node is related to parent-MT receiving propagation delay Tp0. The IAB-MT has timing advance control (original Case #1 timing) of TA with IAB-MT receiving propagation delay Tp. The following definitions may be used: [00151] (a) TA case1: The original Case#1 TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #1 timing mode;
[00152] (b) TAcase7 : The absolute Case #7 TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #7 timing mode;
[00153] (c) Tp0: parent-MT RX propagation delay; and [00154] (d) Tp : IAB-MT RX propagation delay. [00155] The shifting offset from Case #1 TA to absolute Case #7 TA is defined as:
[00156] TAoffset,Case7 = TACase1 ---- TACase7 (1)
[00157] The TAoffset,Case7 value can be derived with the following steps: [00158] (a) IAB-MT RX timing is Tp behind DL TX timing. IAB-MT TX
Case #1 timing is TACase1 ahead of IAB-MT RX timing. →IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TACase1-Tv ahead of DL TX timing. →Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T ACase1-2Tp ahead of DL TX timing.
[00159] (b) Parent-MT RX timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing. Parent-
DU RX Case #7 timing is the same as parent-MT RX timing. → Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing.
[00160] (c) Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is TACase1-2Tp ahead of DL
TX timing (from Step a). Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing (from Step b). ^Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T ACase1-2Tp+Tp0 ahead of Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing. →IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TACase1-2Tp+Tp0 ahead of IAB-MT TX Case#7 timing. → TAoffset,Case7 = TACase1-27p+Tp0.
[00161] (d) TAcase1 =2Tp + Tq (as illustrated in FIG.. 9). → TAoffset,Case7 = TAcase1-2Tp+ Tp0 (from Step c). → TAoffset,Case7 =Tp0+ Tg .
[00162] Therefore, the following configurations for the TAs can be obtained:
[00163] TA Case# 7 = TA Case#1-TAoffset,Case#7 = 2Tp - Tp0 (2), and TAoffset,Case#7 = TA Case# 1 - TA Case# 7 = TA Case# 1 -- 2Tp + Tp0 — Tp0 + Ts (3).
[00164] As there is no fixed relationship between the propagation delay at the parent link (Tp0) and child link (Tp), the Case #7 TA in Equation (2) may be negative, which is one issue that, is addressed by the present techniques for Case #7 timing. The LAB node with Case #7 timing may also need to address the issue of different parent-DU RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to Case #7 timing and legacy IAB nodes and UEs which are still in Case #1 timing. [00165] In some aspects, the disclosed techniques address another issue to enable Case #7 timing at a parent TAB node, namely, when an lAB-MT's TA is changed from Case #1 TA to Case #7 TA, it will cause an issue for the IAB- node to decide its DL TX timing. Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX with Case #6 Timing
[00166] FIG. 10 illustrates diagram 1000 of Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 10 illustrates the timing relationship with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX operation. LAB MT TX timing (original Case #1 timing) has timing advance control of TA0 with parent link propagation delay Tp0. To achieve Case #6 timing for simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX at an IAB node, the MT's TX timing may be shifted to align with the DU's TX timing. The shifting offset from Case #1 timing to Case #6 timing can be easily calculated as
[00167] TAoffset,Case#6 = TA0 - Tp0 (5) [00168] The Case #6 TA will become:
[00169] TACase#6 = TA0 ---- TAoffset,Case#6 = Tp0 (6)
[00170] Both the TA offset and the Case #6 TA are positive values.
However, when Case #6 TA is transmitted instead of Case #1 TA, the LAB node may not calculate its DL TX timing based on the Case #6 TA. In addition, the parent IAB node needs to address the issue of different parent DLT RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to the new' Case #6 timing and legacy IAB nodes which are still in Case #1 timing.
Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX
[00171] FIG. 11 illustrates a diagram 1100 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. FIG. 12 illustrates a diagram 1200 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 illustrate trvo possible timing relationships with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX operation at an IAB node, either by shifting its child IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 11) or by shifting the IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 12). The shifting offset and the new TA for child MT in FIG. 11 are (Note that. TA0 = 2Tp0 + Tg0 and TA= 2Tp + Tg): [00172] TAoffset,childMT === -ΔS === ( TA - 2Tp) ( TA0 - Tp0) = Tg Tp0 - Tg0 (7), and
[00173] TAchildMT === TA ---- T Aoffset childMT === 2Tp + Tp0 + Tg0 (8).
[00174] The shift offset and the new TA for LAB MT in FIG. 12 are:
[00175] TAoffset,MT === ΔS === (TAQ — Tp0) — (TA — 2Tp) = Tp0 + Tg0
Tq (9), and
[00176] TAMT === TA0 ---- T Aoffset,MT === Tp0 + Tg (10).
[00177] In this regard, TA offsets for the two possible timing relationships may be positive or negative, but the new TAs are positive.
[00178] The following includes a description of proposed TA mechanisms for simultaneous operations.
[00179] (A) Mechanism 1 : Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
[00180] In this mechanism, the following two procedures may be configured: one to modify the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new TA range for simultaneous operation, and another one to introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing.
[00181] (A.1) Procedure 1 : Modify current TA transmission scheme to accommodate new TA range for simultaneous operations.
[00182] In mechanism 1, the absolute TA values according to different simultaneous operations are transmitted (Eq. (2) for MT-RX/DU-RX; Eq. (6) for MT-TX/DU-TX; Eq. (8) or Eq.(IO) for MT-TX/DU-RX), listed as below:
[00183] (a) M T-RXZDL I-RX: TAchildMT = Tp0 - 2Tp;
[00184] (b) MT-TX/DU-TX: TAMT = Tp0 ; and
[00185] (c) MT-TX/DU-RX: TAchildMT = 2Tp + Tp0 + Tg0 or
TAMT = Tp0 + Tg.
[00186] (A.1.1) Option I : modify TA command in medium access control random access response (MAC RAR). [00187] In the current 3 GPP specification, the TA is given as TTA =
(NTA + NTA,offset) • Tc (e.g., TS38.211-4.3.1), where the value of (note that this is a fixed offset and not the offset discussed in this disclosure) depends on the duplex mode of the cell in which the uplink transmission takes place and the frequency range (FR) and is defined in TS38.133 Table 7.1.2-2. NTA is further calculated by NTA = TA • 16 • 64/2μ where TA = 0,1,2, ... ,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the TA command in MAC RAR.
[00188] In some aspects, to support simultaneous operations, in this mechanism, the TA range may be changed, to accommodate possibly negative TA for MT-RXZDU-RX. One option is to pre-define a minimum TA min value, which can be negative and transmit positive TA, sim in TA command in MAC RAR. The new TA (TTA, sim) may be determined as follows:
[00189] (a) TTA, sim === (NTA, sim + NTA,offset ) • Tc: and
[00190] (b) NTA, sim = ' 16 • 64/2μ
[00191] In one embodiment, TA, min === ---- 3846 is defined and TA, sim ===
0,1,2, ... ,7692 is communicated in MAC RAR, which needs to extend the current 12 bits TA command field in MAC ICAR to 13 bits.
[00192] (A. 1.2) Option 2: modify the TA command in MAC CE.
[00193] In the current 3GPP specification, the TA can be further modified in the TA command in the MAC CE. With the MAC CE TA command (6 bits), it indicates an index value of For subcarrier spacing of
Figure imgf000040_0001
2
Figure imgf000040_0006
kHz, with a current
Figure imgf000040_0002
value, the new
Figure imgf000040_0004
value, can be
Figure imgf000040_0003
Figure imgf000040_0005
calculated as NTA_ new = NTA_ old + (TA --- 31) • 16 • 64/2μ .
[00194] To support mechanism 1 for simultaneous operations, we can redefine NTA_ new Calculation as NTA_ new === NTA_ old +( TA,sim - NA, max) • 16
64/2μ , where TA max is a pre-defined value and transmit positive TA,sim in TA command MAC CE. In one embodiment, TA, max = 7692 is defined and TA,sim === 0,1,2, ... ,7755 is transmitted in TA command MAC CE, which may extend the current 6 bits TA command field in MAC CE to 13 bits.
[00195] In some aspects, Option 1 and Option 2 can be applied independently and jointly . [00196] (A.2) Procedure 2: Introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing.
[00197] In mechanism 1, since the transmitted TA has been changed from Case #1 TA due to simultaneous operations, DU DL TX timing calculation originally designed based on Case #1 TA may not be conducted. The following are scenarios that may be used to stop calculating/adjusting DU DL TX timing due to mechanism 1 :
[00198] (a) For MT RX/DU RX in an IAB node, its child IAB node needs to stop calculating/adjusting child DU DL TX timing. [00199] (b) For MT TX/DU TX in an IAB node, the IAB node itself needs to stop calculating/adjusting DU DL TX timing.
[00200] (c) For MT TX/DU RX in an IAB node, either its child IAB node or the IAB node itself needs to sop calculating/adjust child DU or DU DL TX timing. [00201] In this regard, if a child IAB node needs to stop calculating/adjusting child DU DL TX timing due to its parent node's simultaneous operation, the child IAB node does not know the received TA is Case #1 TA or new TA to support simultaneous operation, hence, additional signaling to inform the child node not to calculate/adjust child DU DL TX timing is needed. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
[00202] (B) Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
[00203] In this mechanism, the Case #1 TA ( TAcase#1 ) defined in the current specification can be re-used and always transmitted, which means the current TA command RAR and TA command MAC CE may not be modified. To fulfill simultaneous operations, an additional TA offset may be configured as follows: TAsim,offset ( Eq. (4 ) for MT-RX/DU-RX; Eq.(5) for MT-TX/DU-TX; Eq. (7) or Eq. (9) for MT-TXZDU-RX) can be transmitted, listed as below: [00204] (a) Case #7 timing: MT-RX7DU-RX: TAsim,offset,childMT ==
Tg + Tp0 ;
[00205] (b) Case #6 timing: MT-TX/DU-TX: TAsim,offset,MT = TA0 --- Tp0 === Tg0 + Tp0 ;
[00206] (c) MT-TXZDU-RX: TAsim,offset,childMT == Tg --- Tp0 --- Tg0 or TAsim,offset,MT = Tp0 + Tg0 --- Tg.
[00207] After receiving the Case# 1 TA and the timing offset due to simultaneous operations, the IAB MI' can calculate the new TA for MT TX timing as TAnew — TAcase#1 --- TAsim,offset.
[00208] The benefit of mechanism 2 is that since Case #1 TA is always transmitted, DL TX timing calculation based on Case #1 timing can be always fulfilled and no additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX tinting is needed.
[00209] For transmitting the timing offset due to simultaneous operations, similar signaling as the current TA mechanism can be applied using one or more of the following options:
[00210] (a) Option 1 : introduce new field in MAC RAR;
[00211] (b) Option 2: introduce new field in existing TA command MAC
CE; and
[00212] (c) Option 3: introduce a new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE.
[00213] To support MT-RX/DU-RX (Case #7 timing) and MT-TX/DU- TX (Case #6 timing), since they are both positive and have a similar range as Case #1 timing, TA == 0,1,2, ...,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the above three options for timing offset command, and the timing offset is calculated based on the simultaneous operations as follows: TAsim,offset == Tsim,offset . 16 • 64 • Tc/2μ .
[00214] To support MT-TX/DU-RX in addition to MT-RXDU - RX and MT-TX/DU-TX, since the shifting offset may be negative, the range may need to be further extended. A minimum Tsim,offset,min the value may be pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit positive Tsim,offset in the timing offset Command. In this regard, TAsim,offset == (Tsim,offset,min + Tsim,offset) .
16 • 64/2μ .
[00215] In one embodiment, Tsim,offset,min == --- 3846 may be pre-defined and Tsim,offset = 0,1, 2, ... ,7692 is transmitted with 13 bits in the above three options for timing offset command.
[00216] In some aspects, the TA offset may be defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TAcase#1) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
Figure imgf000043_0001
[00217] The TA offset can also be defined as TAnew minus TACase#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar:
Figure imgf000043_0002
[00218] In some embodiments, to support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the LAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset. The new TAs corresponding to different simultaneous operations are MT-RXZDU-RX: TAchildMT = 2Tp - Tp0 ; MT-TX/DU-TX;
Figure imgf000043_0003
[00219] In some aspects, the TA offset corresponding to different simultaneous operations are MT-RXZDU-RX: TAsim o^set cllildMT == Tg + Tp0,
Figure imgf000043_0004
Tg, where Tp0/ Tg0 are propagation delay at parent link and UL to DL switching gap at parent node; Tp/Tg are propagation delay at child link and UL to DL switching gap at the IAB node.
[00220] In some aspects, mechanism 1 may be used, which includes transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations; and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
[00221] In some aspects, procedure 1 includes modifying the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new I' A range for simultaneous operations. In some aspects, Option 1 includes modifying the TA command in MAC RAR (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above). In some aspects, Option 2 includes modifying the TA command in MAC CE (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
[00222] In some aspects, Procedure 2 includes introducing additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
[00223] In some aspects, Mechanism 2 includes always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset (e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above) transmission according to different simultaneous operations. The following signaling options may be used: Option 1 (introduce new field in MAC RAR), Option 2 (introduce new field in existing TA command MAC CE), and Option 3 (introduce new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE).
[00224] In some aspects, to support MT-RX/DU-RX (Case #7 timing) and MT-TX/DU-TX (Case #6 timing), since they are both positive and have a similar range as Case #1 timing, TA == 0,1,2, ,.,,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the above three options for timing offset command, and calculate the timing offset due to simultaneous operations as follows: TAsim,offset == Tsim,offset . 16 • 64 • Tc/2μ .
[00225] In some aspects, to support MT-TX/DU-RX in addition to MT- RX/DU-RX and MT-TX/DU-TX, since the shifting offset may be negative, the range may need to be further extended. A minimum Tsim,offset,min value is pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit, positive Tsim,offset in the timing offset command. The timing offset due to simultaneous operations is calculated as follows. TAsim,offset == (Tsim,offset,min + Tsim,offset) • 16 •64/2μ. Note, the TA offset is defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TAcase#1) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g. TACase#6, TACase#7, etc. (TAnew) and TAsim,offset == TAcase#1 --- TAnew. In some aspects, the TA offset can also be defined as TAnew minus TAcase#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar: TAsim,offset == TAnew — TACase#1. [00226] FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects and to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein. In alternative aspects, the communication device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other communication devices.
[00227] Circuitry (e.g., processing circuitry') is a collection of circuits implemented in tangible entities of the devi ce 1300 that include hardware (e.g., simple circuits, gates, logic, etc.). Circuitry membership may be flexible over time. Circuitries include members that may, alone or in combination, perform specified operations when operating. In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may be immutably designed to carry' out a specific operation (e.g., hardwired). In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may include variably connected physical components (e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.) including a machine-readable medium physically modified (e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.) to encode instructions of the specific operation.
[00228] In connecting the physical components, the underlying electrical properties of a hardware constituent are changed, for example, from an insulator to a conductor or vice versa. The instructions enable embedded hardware (e.g., the execution units or a loading mechanism) to create members of the circuitry' in hardware via the variable connections to carry out portions of the specific operation when in operation. Accordingly, in an example, the machine-readable medium elements are part of the circuitry or are communicatively coupled to the other components of the circuitry when the device is operating. In an example, any of the physical components may be used in more than one member of more than one circuitry. For example, under operation, execution units may be used in a first circuit of a first circuitry at one point in time and reused by a second circuit in the first circuitry, or by a third circuit in a second circuitry at a different time. Additional examples of these components with respect to the device 1300 follow.
[00229] In some aspects, the device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other devices. In a networked deployment, the communication device 1300 may operate in the capacity of a server communication device, a client communication device, or both in server- client network environments. In an example, the communication device 1300 may act as a peer communication device in a peer-to-peer (P2P) (or other distributed) network environment. The communication device 1300 may be a UE, eNB, PC, a tablet PC, an STB, a PDA, a mobile telephone, a smartphone, a web appliance, a network router, switch or bridge, or any communication device capable of executing instructions (sequential or otherwise) that specify actions to be taken by that communication device. Further, while only a single communication device is illustrated, the term "communication device" shall also be taken to include any collection of communication devices that individually or jointly execute a set (or multiple sets) of instructions to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein, such as cloud computing, software as a service (SaaS), and other computer cluster configurations.
[00230] Examples, as described herein, may include, or may operate on, logic or a number of components, modules, or mechanisms. Modules are tangible entities (e.g., hardware) capable of performing specified operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner. In an example, circuits may be arranged (e.g., internally or with respect to external entities such as other circuits) in a specified manner as a module. In an example, the whole or part of one or more computer systems (e.g., a standalone, client, or server computer system) or one or more hardware processors may be configured by firmware or software (e.g., instructions, an application portion, or an application) as a module that operates to perform specified operations. In an example, the software may reside on a communication device-readable medium. In an example, the software, when executed by the underlying hardware of the module, causes the hardware to perform the specified operations.
[00231] Accordingly, the term "module" is understood to encompass a tangible entity, be that an entity that is physically constructed, specifically configured (e.g., hardwired), or temporarily (e.g., transitorily) configured (e.g., programmed) to operate in a specified manner or to perform part or all of any operation described herein. Considering examples in which modules are temporarily configured, each of the modules need not be instantiated at any one moment in time. For example, where the modules comprise a general-purpose hardware processor configured using the software, the general-purpose hardware processor may be configured as respective different modules at different times. The software may accordingly configure a hardware processor, for example, to constitute a particular module at one instance of time and to constitute a different module at a different instance of time.
[00232] The communication device (e.g., UE) 1300 may include a hardware processor 1302 (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a hardware processor core, or any combination thereof), a main memory 1304, a static memory 1306, and a storage device 1307 (e.g., hard drive, tape drive, flash storage, or other block or storage devices), some or all of which may communicate with each other via an interlink (e.g., bus) 1308. [00233] The communication device 1300 may further include a display device 1310, an alphanumeric input device 1312 (e.g., a keyboard), and a user interface (UI) navigation device 1314 (e.g., a mouse). In an example, the display device 1310, input device 1312, and UI navigation device 1314 may be a touchscreen display. The communication device 1300 may additionally include a signal generation device 1318 (e.g., a speaker), a network interface device 1320, and one or more sensors 1321, such as a global positioning system (GPS) sensor, compass, accelerometer, or another sensor. The communication device 1300 may include an output controller 1328, such as a serial (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card reader, etc.).
[00234] The storage device 1307 may include a communication device- readable medium 1322, on which is stored one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324 (e.g,, software) embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein. In some aspects, registers of the processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory 1306, and/or the storage device 1307 may be, or include (completely or at least partially), the device-readable medium 1322, on which is stored the one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324, embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein. In an example, one or any combination of the hardware processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory' 1306, or the mass storage 1316 may constitute the device-readable medium 1322.
[00235] As used herein, the term "device-readable medium" is interchangeable with “computer-readable medium” or “machine-readable medium”. While the communication device-readable medium 1322 is illustrated as a single medium, the term "communication device-readable medium" may include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, and/or associated caches and servers) configured to store the one or more instructions 1324. The term "communication device-readable medium" is inclusive of the terms “machine-readable medium” or “computer-readable medium”, and may include any medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions (e.g., instructions 1324) for execution by the communication device 1300 and that causes the communication device 1300 to perform any one or more of the techniques of the present disclosure, or that is capable of storing, encoding or carrying data structures used by or associated with such instructions. Non-limiting communication device-readable medium examples may include solid-state memories and optical and magnetic media. Specific examples of communication device-readable media may include non- volatile memory, such as semiconductor memory devices (e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and flash memory'- devices; magnetic disks, such as internal hard disks and removable disks; magneto- optical disks; Random Access Memory (RAM), and CD-ROM and DVD-ROM disks. In some examples, communication device-readable media may include non-transitory communication device-readable media. In some examples, communication device-readable media may include communication device- readable media that is not a transitory propagating signal. [00236] Instructions 1324 may further be transmitted or received over a communications network 1326 using a transmission medium via the network interface device 1320 utilizing any one of a number of transfer protocols. In an example, the network interface device 1320 may include one or more physical jacks (e.g., Ethernet, coaxial, or phonejacks) or one or more antennas to connect to the communications network 1326. In an example, the network interface device 1320 may include a plurality of antennas to wirelessly communicate using at least one of single-input-multiple-output (SIMO), MIMO, or multiple- input-single-output (MISO) techniques. In some examples, the network interface device 1320 may wirelessly communicate using Multiple User MIMO techniques.
[00237] The term "transmission medium" shall be taken to include any intangible medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions for execution by the communication device 1300, and includes digital or analog communications signals or another intangible medium to facilitate communication of such software. In this regard, a transmission medium in the context of this disclosure is a device-readable medium.
[00238] The terms “machine-readable medium,” “computer-readable medium,” and “device-readable medium” mean the same thing and may be used interchangeably in this disclosure. The terms are defined to include both machine-storage media and transmission media. Thus, the terms include both storage devices/media and carrier waves/modulated data signals.
[00239] Described implementations of the subject matter can include one or more features, alone or in combination as illustrated below by w'ay of examples.
[00240] Example 1 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of di stributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and a Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU tunction of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
[00241] In Example 2, the subject matter of Example 1 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00242] In Example 3, the subject matter of Example 2 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00243] In Example 4, the subject matter of Example 3 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
[00244] In Example 5, the subject matter of Examples 3-4 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
[00245] In Example 6, the subject matter of Examples 1-5 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value. [00246] In Example 7, the subject matter of Example 6 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (M AC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00247] In Example 8, the subject matter of Examples 6-7 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command. [00248] In Example 9, the subject matter of Examples 1-8 includes, transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry; and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry.
[00249] Example 10 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (TAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent IAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
[00250] In Example 11, the subject matter of Example 10 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00251] In Example 12, the subject matter of Example 11 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00252] Example 13 is a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of the distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network and to cause the parent IAB node to determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value. [00253] In Example 14, the subject matter of Example 13 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00254] In Example 15, the subject matter of Example 14 includes, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00255] In Example 16, the subject matter of Example 15 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
[00256] In Example 17, the subject matter of Examples 15-16 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
[00257] In Example 18, the subject matter of Examples 13-17 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
[00258] In Example 19, the subject matter of Example 18 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00259] In Example 20, the subject matter of Examples 18-19 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00260] Example 21 is at least one machine-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, cause the processing circuitry to perform operations to implement any of Examples 1-20, [00261] Example 22 is an apparatus comprising means to implement any of Examples 1-20.
[00262] Example 23 is a system to implement any of Examples 1 -20.
[00263] Example 24 is a method to implement any of Examples 1-20. [00264] Although an aspect has been described with reference to specific exemplary aspects, it will be evident that various modifications and changes may be made to these aspects without departing from the broader scope of the present disclosure. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are to be regarded in an illustrative rather than a restrictive sense. This Detailed Description, therefore, is not to be taken in a limiting sense, and the scope of various aspects is defined only by the appended claims, along with the full range of equivalents to which such claims are entitled.
TIMING ADVANCE (TA) CONFIGURATIONS FOR LAB NETWORKS
PRIORITY CLAIM
[0001] This application claims the benefit of priority to United States Provisional Patent Application 63/104,811, filed October 23, 2020, and entitled “TIMING ADVANCE (TA) MECHANISMS TO SUPPORT SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS,'' which patent application is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0002] Aspects pertain to wireless communications. Some aspects relate to wireless networks including 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) networks, 3GPP LTE (Long Term Evolution) networks, 3GPP LTE-A (LTE Advanced) networks, (MulteFire, LTE-U), and fifth-generation (5G) networks including 5G new radio (NR) (or 5G-NR) networks, 5G-LTE networks such as 5G NR unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) networks, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) networks, and other unlicensed networks including Wi-Fi, CBRS (OnGo), etc. Other aspects are directed to techniques for timing advance (TA) mechanisms including configuration to support simultaneous operations in IAB networks.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Mobile communications have evolved significantly from early voice systems to today's highly sophisticated integrated communication platform. With the increase in different types of devices communicating with various network devices, usage of 3 GPP LTE systems has increased. The penetration of mobile devices (user equipment or UEs) in modern society has continued to drive demand for a wide variety of networked devices in many disparate environments. Fifth-generation (5G) wireless systems are forthcoming and are expected to enable even greater speed, connectivity, and usability. Next generation 5G networks (or NR networks) are expected to increase throughput, coverage, and robustness and reduce latency and operational and capital expenditures. 5G-NR networks will continue to evolve based on 3GPP LTE- Advanced with additional potential new radio access technologies (RATs) to enrich people's lives with seamless wireless connectivity solutions delivering fast, rich content and services. As current cellular network frequency is saturated, higher frequencies, such as millimeter wave (mmWave) frequency, can be beneficial due to their high bandwidth.
[0004] Potential LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum includes (and is not limited to) the LTE operation in the unlicensed spectrum via dual connectivity (DC), or DC-based LAA, and the standalone LTE system in the unlicensed spectrum, according to which LTE-based technology solely operates in the unlicensed spectrum without requiring an “anchor” in the licensed spectrum, called MulteFire. Further enhanced operation of LTE and NR systems in the licensed, as well as unlicensed spectrum, is expected in future releases and 5G systems. Such enhanced operations can include techniques for supporting TA configurations in IAB networks.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
[0005] In the figures, which are not necessarily drawn to scale, like numerals may describe similar components in different views. Like numerals having different letter suffixes may represent different instances of similar components. The figures illustrate generally, by way of example, but not by way of limitation, various aspects discussed in the present document.
[0006] FIG. 1 A illustrates an architecture of a network, in accordance with some aspects.
[0007] FIG. IB and FIG. 1C illustrate a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects.
[0008] FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments.
[0009] FIG. 5 illustrates a reference diagram of an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
[0010] FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU) - distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an IAB architecture, in accordance with some aspects.
[0011] FIG. 7 illustrates IAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios, in accordance with some aspects.
[0012] FIG. 8 illustrates parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0013] FIG. 9 illustrates TAcase1/Tp/Tg relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
[0014] FIG. 10 illustrates Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments.
[0015] FIG. 11 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0016] FIG. 12 illustrates MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[0017] FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0018] The following description and the drawings sufficiently illustrate aspects to enable those skilled in the art to practice them. Other aspects may incorporate structural, logical, electrical, process, and other changes. Portions and features of some aspects may be included in or substituted for, those of other aspects. Aspects outlined in the claims encompass all available equivalents of those claims.
[0019] FIG. 1A illustrates an architecture of a network in accordance with some aspects. The network 140A is shown to include user equipment (UE)
101 and UE 102. The UEs 101 and 102 are illustrated as smartphones (e.g., handheld touchscreen mobile computing devices connectable to one or more cellular networks) but may also include any mobile or non-mobile computing device, such as Personal Data Assistants (PDAs), pagers, laptop computers, desktop computers, wireless handsets, drones, or any other computing device including a wired and/or wireless communications interface. The UEs 101 and
102 can be collectively referred to herein as UE 101, and UE 101 can be used to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein.
[0020] Any of the radio links described herein (e.g., as used in the network 140 A or any other illustrated network) may operate according to any exemplary radio communication technology and/or standard.
[0021] LTE and LTE- Advanced are standards for wireless communications of high-speed data for UE such as mobile telephones. In LTE- Advanced and various wireless systems, carrier aggregation is a technology- according to which multiple carrier signals operating on different frequencies may be used to cany communications for a single UE, thus increasing the bandwidth available to a single device. In some aspects, carrier aggregation may- be used where one or more component carriers operate on unlicensed frequencies.
[0022] Aspects described herein can be used in the context of any spectrum management scheme including, for example, dedicated licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, (licensed) shared spectrum (such as Licensed Shared Access (LSA) in 2.3-2.4 GHz, 3.4-3.6 GHz, 3.6-3.8 GHz, and further frequencies and Spectrum Access System (SAS) m 3.55-3.7 GHz and further frequencies).
[0023] Aspects described herein can also be applied to different Single Carrier or OFDM flavors (CP-OFDM, SC-FDMA, SC-OFDM, filter bank-based multicarrier (FBMC), OFDMA, etc.) and in particular 3GPP NR (New Radio) by allocating the OFDM carrier data bit vectors to the corresponding symbol resources.
[0024] In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can comprise an Internet-of-Things (lo l ) UE or a Cellular loT (CIoT) UE, which can comprise a network access layer designed for low-power loT applications utilizing short- lived UE connections. In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include a narrowband (NB) loT UE (e.g., such as an enhanced NB-IoT (eNB-IoT) UE and Further Enhanced (FeNB-loT) UE). An loT UE can utilize technologies such as machine-to-machine (M2M) or machine-type communications (MTC) for exchanging data with an MTC server or device via a public land mobile network (PLMN), Proximity-Based Service (ProSe), or device-to-device (D2D) communication, sensor networks, or loT networks. The M2M or MTC exchange of data may be a machine-initiated exchange of data. An loT network includes interconnecting loT UEs, which may include uniquely identifiable embedded computing devices (within the Internet infrastructure), with short-lived connections. The loT UEs may execute background applications (e.g., keep- alive messages, status updates, etc.) to facilitate the connections of the loT network.
[0025] In some aspects, any of the UEs 101 and 102 can include enhanced MTC (eMTC) UEs or further enhanced MTC (FeMTC) UEs. [0026] The UEs 101 and 102 may be configured to connect, e.g., communicatively couple, with a radio access network (RAN) 110. The RAN 110 may be, for example, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), a NextGen RAN (NG RAN), or some other type of RAN. The UEs 101 and 102 utilize connections 103 and 104, respectively, each of which comprises a physical communications interface or layer (discussed in further detail below); in this example, the connections 103 and 104 are illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols, such as a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) protocol, a code-division multiple access (CDMA) network protocol, a Push-to-Talk (PTT) protocol, a PTT over Cellular (POC) protocol, a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) protocol, a 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) protocol, a fifth-generation (5G) protocol, a New Radio (NR) protocol, and the like.
[0027] In an aspect, the UEs 101 and 102 may further directly exchange communication data via a ProSe interface 105. The ProSe interface 105 may alternatively be referred to as a sidelink interface comprising one or more logical channels, including but not limited to a Physical Sidelink Control Channel (PSCCH), a Physical Sidelink Shared Channel (PSSCH), a Physical Sidelink Discovery Channel (PSDCH), and a Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel (PSBCH).
[0028] The UE 102 is shown to be configured to access an access point (AP) 106 via connection 107. The connection 107 can comprise a local wireless connection, such as, for example, a connection consistent with any IEEE 802.11 protocol, according to which the AP 106 can comprise a wireless fidelity (WiFi®) router. In this example, the AP 106 is shown to be connected to the Internet without connecting to the core network of the wireless system (described in further detail below).
[0029] The RAN 110 can include one or more access nodes that, enable connections 103 and 104. These access nodes (ANs) can be referred to as base stations (BSs), NodeBs, evolved NodeBs (eNBs), Next Generation NodeBs (gNBs), RAN network nodes, and the like, and can comprise ground stations (e.g., terrestrial access points) or satellite stations providing coverage within a geographic area (e.g., a cell). In some aspects, the communication nodes 111 and 112 can be transmission/reception points (TRPs). In instances when the communication nodes 111 and 112 are NodeBs (e.g., eNBs or gNBs), one or more TRPs can function within the communication cell of the NodeBs. The RAN 110 may include one or more RAN nodes for providing macrocells, e.g., macro RAN node 111, and one or more RAN nodes for providing femtocells or picocells (e.g., cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells), e.g., low power (LP) RAN node 112 or an unlicensed spectrum based secondary RAN node 112.
[0030] Any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can terminate the air interface protocol and can be the first point of contact for the UEs 101 and 102. In some aspects, any of the RAN nodes 111 and 112 can fulfill various logical functions for the RAN 110 including, but not limited to, radio network controller (RNC) functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling, and mobility management. In an example, any of the nodes 111 and/or 112 can be a new generation Node-B (gNB), an evolved node-B (eNB), or another type of RAN node.
[0031] The RAN 110 is shown to be communicatively coupled to a core network (CN) 120 via an SI interface 113. In aspects, the CN 120 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) network, a NextGen Packet Core (NPC) network, or some other type of CN (e.g., as illustrated in reference to FIGS. 1B-1C). In this aspect, the SI interface 113 is split into two parts: the Sl-U interface 114, which carries user traffic data between the R AN nodes 111 and 112 and the serving gateway (S-GW) 122, and the SI -mobility management entity (MME) interface 115, which is a signaling interface between the RAN nodes 111 and 112 and MM I is 121.
[0032] In this aspect, the CN 120 comprises the MMEs 121, the S-GW 122, the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (P-GW) 123, and a home subscriber server (HSS) 124. The MMEs 121 may be similar in function to the control plane of legacy Serving General Packet Radio Sendee (GPRS) Support Nodes (SGSN). The MMEs 121 may manage mobility aspects in access such as gateway selection and tracking area list management. The HSS 124 may comprise a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions. The CN 120 may comprise one or several HSSs 124, depending on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment, on the organization of the network, etc. For example, the HSS 124 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/ addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc. [0033] The S-GW 122 may termmate the SI interface 113 towards the RAN 110, and route data packets between the RAN 110 and the CN 120. In addition, the S-GW 122 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities of the S-GW 122 may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
[0034] The P-GW 123 may terminate an SGi interface toward a PDN. The P-GW 123 may route data packets between the EPC network 120 and external networks such as a network including the application server 184 (alternatively referred to as application function (AT)) via an Internet Protocol (IP) interface 125. The P-GW 123 can also communicate data to other external networks 131 A, which can include the Internet, IP multimedia subsystem (IPS) network, and other networks. Generally, the application server 184 may be an element offering applications that use IP bearer resources with the core network (e.g., UMTS Packet Services (PS) domain, LTE PS data services, etc.). In this aspect, the P-GW 123 is shown to be communicatively coupled to an application server 184 via an IP interface 125. The application server 184 can also be configured to support one or more communication services (e.g., Voice-over- Internet Protocol (VoIP) sessions, PTT sessions, group communication sessions, social networking services, etc.) for the UEs 101 and 102 via the CN 120.
[0035] The P-GW 123 may further be a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection. Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) 126 is the policy and charging control element of the CN 120. In a non-roaming scenario, in some aspects, there may be a single PCRF in the Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) associated with a UE's Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session. In a roaming scenario with a local breakout of traffic, there may be two PCRFs associated with a UE's IP-CAN session: a Home PCRF (H-PCRF) within an HPLMN and a Visited PCRF (V-PCRF) within a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN). The PCRF 126 may be communicatively coupled to the application server 184 via the P-GW 123.
[0036] In some aspects, the communication network 140A can be an loT network or a 5G network, including a 5G new radio network using communications in the licensed (5G NR) and the unlicensed (5G NR-U) spectrum. One of the current enablers of loT is the narrowband-IoT (NB-IoT). [0037] An NG system architecture can include the RAN 110 and a 5G network core (5GC ) 120. The NG-RAN 110 can include a plurality of nodes, such as gNBs and NG-eNBs. The core network 120 (e.g., a 5G core network or 5GC) can include an access and mobility function (AMF) and/or a user plane function (UPF). The AMF and the UPF can be communicatively coupled to the gNBs and the NG-eNBs via NG interfaces. More specifically, in some aspects, the gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be connected to the AMF by NG-C interfaces, and to the UPF by NG-U interfaces. The gNBs and the NG-eNBs can be coupled to each other via Xn interfaces.
[0038] In some aspects, the NG system architecture can use reference points between various nodes as provided by 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 23.501 (e.g., V15.4.0, 2018-12). In some aspects, each of the gNBs and the NG- eNBs can be implemented as a base station, a mobile edge server, a small cell, a home eNB, a RAN network node, and so forth. In some aspects, a gNB can be a master node (MN) and NG-eNB can be a secondary node (SN) in a 5G architecture. In some aspects, the master/primary node may operate in a licensed band and the secondary node may operate in an unlicensed band.
[0039] FIG. IB illustrates a non-roaming 5G system architecture in accordance with some aspects. Referring to FIG. IB, there is illustrated a 5G system architecture 140B in a reference point representation. More specifically, UE 102 can be in communication with ILAN 110 as well as one or more other 5G core (5GC) network entities. The 5G system architecture 140B includes a plurality of network functions (NFs), such as access and mobility management function (AMF) 132, location management function (LMF) 133, session management function (SMF) 136, policy control function (PCF) 148, application function (AF) 150, user plane function (UPF) 134, network slice selection function (NSSF) 142, authentication server function (AUSF) 144, and unified data management (UDM)/home subscriber server (HSS) 146. The UPF 134 can provide a connection to a data network (DN) 152, which can include, for example, operator services, Internet access, or third-party services. The AMF 132 can be used to manage access control and mobility and can also include network slice selection functionality. The SMF 136 can be configured to set up and manage various sessions according to network policy. The UPF 134 can be deployed in one or more configurations according to the desired service type. The PCF 148 can be configured to provide a policy framework using network slicing, mobility management, and roaming (similar to PCRF in a 4G communication system). The UDM can be configured to store subscriber profiles and data (similar to an HSS in a 4G communication system).
[0040] The LMF 133 may be used in connection with 5G positioning functionalities. In some aspects, LMF 133 receives measurements and assistance information from the next generation radio access network (NG- RAN) 110 and the mobile device (e.g., UE 101) via the AMF 132 over the NLs interface to compute the position of the UE 101. In some aspects, NR positioning protocol A (NRPPa) may be used to carry the positioning information between NG-RAN and LMF 133 over a next generation control plane interface (NG-C). In some aspects, LMF 133 configures the UE using the LTE positioning protocol (LPP) via AMF 132. The NG RAN 110 configures the UE 101 using radio resource control (RRC) protocol over LTE-Uu and NR-Uu interfaces.
[0041] In some aspects, the 5G system architecture 140B configures different reference signals to enable positioning measurements. Example reference signals that mav be used for positioning measurements include the positioning reference signal (NR PRS) in the downlink and the sounding reference signal (SRS) for positioning in the uplink. The downlink positioning reference signal (PRS) is a reference signal configured to support downlink- based positioning methods.
[0042] In some aspects, the 5G system architecture 140B includes an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) 168B as wel l as a plurality of IP multimedia core network subsystem entities, such as call session control functions (CSCFs).
More specifically, the IMS 168B includes a CSCF, which can act as a proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) 162BE, a serving CSCF (S-CSCF) 164B, an emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) (not illustrated in FIG. 1B), or interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) 166B. The P-CSCF 162B can be configured to be the first contact point for the UE 102 within the IM subsystem (IMS) 168B. The S-CSCF 164B can be configured to handle the session states in the network, and the E-CSCF can be configured to handle certain aspects of emergency sessions such as routing an emergency request to the correct emergency center or PSAP. The I-CSCF 166B can be configured to function as the contact point within an operator's network for all IMS connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber currently located within that network operators service area. In some aspects, the I-CSCF 166B can be connected to another IP multimedia network I70E, e.g. an IMS operated by a different network operator.
[0043] In some aspects, the UDM/HSS 146 can be coupled to an application server I60E, which can include a telephony application server (TAS) or another application server (AS). The AS 160B can be coupled to the IMS 168B via the S-CSCF 164B or the I-CSCF 166B.
[0044] A reference point representation shows that interaction can exist between corresponding NF services. For example, FIG. IB illustrates the following reference points: N1 (between the UE 102 and the AMF 132), N2 (between the RAN 110 and the AMF 132), N3 (between the RAN 110 and the UPF 134), N4 (between the SMF 136 and the UPF 134), N5 (between the PCF 148 and the AF 150, not shown), N6 (between the UPF 134 and the DN 152), N7 (between the SMF 136 and the PCF 148, not shown), N8 (between the UDM 146 and the AMF 132, not shown), N9 (between two UPFs 134, not shown), N10 (between the UDM 146 and the SMF 136, not shown), N11 (between the AMF 132 and the SMF 136, not shown), N12 (between the AUSF 144 and the AMF 132, not shown), N13 (between the AUSF 144 and the UDM 146, not shown), N14 (between two AMFs 132, not shown), N15 (between the PCF 148 and the AMF 132 in case of a non-roaming scenario, or between the PCF 148 and a visited network and AMF 132 in case of a roaming scenario, not shown), N16 (between two SMFs, not shown), and N22 (between AMF 132 and NSSF 142, not shown). Other reference point representations not shown in FIG. IB can also be used.
[0045] FIG. 1C illustrates a 5G system architecture 140C and a sendee- based representation. In addition to the network entities illustrated in FIG. IB, system architecture 140C can also include a network exposure function (NEF) 154 and a network repository function (NRF) 156. In some aspects, 5G system architectures can be service-based and interaction between network functions can be represented by corresponding point-to-point reference points Ni or as service-based interfaces.
[0046] In some aspects, as illustrated in FIG. 1C, service-based representations can be used to represent network functions within the control plane that enable other authorized network functions to access their services. In this regard, 5G system architecture 140C can include the following service- based interfaces: Namf 158H (a service-based interface exhibited by the AMF 132), Nsmf 1581 (a service-based interface exhibited by the SMF 136), Nnef 158B (a service-based interface exhibited by the NEF 154), Npcf 158D (a service-based interface exhibited by the PCF 148), a Nudm 158E (a service- based interface exhibited by the UDM 146), Naf 158F (a service-based interface exhibited by the AF 150), Nnrf 158C (a service-based interface exhibited by the NRF 156), Nnssf 158A (a service-based interface exhibited by the NSSF 142), Nausf 158G (a service-based interface exhibited by the AUSF 144). Other service-based interfaces (e.g., Nudr, N5g-eir, and Nudsf) not shown in FIG. 1C can also be used.
[0047] FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. 7 illustrate various systems, devices, and components that may implement aspects of disclosed embodiments in different communication systems, such as 5G-NR networks including IAB networks. UEs, base stations (such as gNBs), and/or other nodes (e.g., any of the communication nodes in an IAB network) discussed in connection with FIGS. 1A-13 can be configured to perform the disclosed techniques.
[0048] FIG. 2 illustrates a network 200 in accordance with various embodiments. The network 200 may operate in a manner consistent with 3GPP technical specifications for LTE or 5G/NR systems. However, the example embodiments are not limited in this regard and the described embodiments may apply to other networks that benefit from the principles described herein, such as future 3GPP systems, or the like.
[0049] The network 200 may include a UE 202, which may include any mobile or non-mobile computing device designed to communicate with a RAN 204 via an over-the-air connection. The UE 202 may be, but is not limited to, a smartphone, tablet computer, wearable computing device, desktop computer, laptop computer, in-vehicle infotainment, in-car entertainment device, instrument cluster, head-up display device, onboard diagnostic device, dashtop mobile equipment, mobile data terminal, electronic engine management system, electronic/engine control unit, electronic/engine control module, embedded system, sensor, microcontroller, control module, engine management system, networked appliance, machine-type communication device, M2M or D2D device, loT device, etc.
[0050] In some embodiments, the network 200 may include a plurality of UEs coupled directly with one another via a sidelink interface. The UEs may be M2M/D2D devices that communicate using physical sidelink channels such as but not limited to, PSBCH, PSDCH, PSSCH, PSCCH, PSFCH, etc.
[0051] In some embodiments, the UE 202 may additionally communicate with an AP 206 via an over-the-air connection. The AP 206 may manage a WLAN connection, which may serve to offload some/all network traffic from the RAN 204. The connection between the UE 202 and the AP 206 may be consistent with any IEEE 802. 11 protocol, wherein the AP 206 could be a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi®) router. In some embodiments, the UE 202, RAN 204, and AP 206 may utilize cellular- WLAN aggregation (for example, LWA/LWIP). Cellular-WLAN aggregation may involve the UE 202 being configured by the RAN 204 to utilize both cellular radio resources and WLAN resources.
[0052] The RAN 204 may include one or more access nodes, for example, access node (AN) 208. AN 208 may terminate air-interface protocols for the UE 202 by providing access stratum protocols including RRC, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), Radio Link Control (RLC), MAC, and LI protocols. In this manner, the AN 208 may enable data/voice connectivity between the core network (CN) 220 and the UE 202. In some embodiments, the AN 208 may be implemented in a discrete device or as one or more software entities miming on server computers as part of, for example, a virtual network, which may be referred to as a CRAN or virtual baseband unit pool. The AN 208 be referred to as a BS, gNB, RAN node, eNB, ng-eNB, NodeB, RSU, TRxP, TRP, etc. The AN 208 may be a macrocell base station or a low-power base station for providing femtocells, picocells, or other like cells having smaller coverage areas, smaller user capacity, or higher bandwidth compared to macrocells.
[0053] In embodiments in which the RAN 204 includes a plurality of ANs, they may be coupled with one another via an X2 interface (if the RAN 204 is an LTE RAN) or an Xn interface (if the RAN 204 is a 5(3- RAN). The X2/Xn interfaces, which may be separated into control/user plane interfaces in some embodiments, may allow the ANs to communicate information related to handovers, data/context transfers, mobility, load management, interference coordination, etc.
[0054] The ANs of the RAN 204 may each manage one or more cells, cell groups, component carriers, etc. to provide the UE 202 with an air interface for network access. The UE 202 may be simultaneously connected with a plurality of cells provided by the same or different ANs of the RAN 204. For example, the UE 202 and RAN 204 may use carrier aggregation to allow the UE 202 to connect with a plurality of component carriers, each corresponding to a Pcell or Scell. In dual connectivity scenarios, a first AN may be a master node that provides an MCG and a second AN may be a secondary node that provides an SCG. The first/second ANs may be any combination of eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, etc.
[0055] The RAN 204 may provide the air interface over a licensed spectrum or an unlicensed spectrum. To operate in the unlicensed spectrum, the nodes may use LAA, eLAA, and/or feLAA mechanisms based on CA technology with PCells/Scells. Before accessing the unlicensed spectrum, the nodes may perform medium/carrier-sensing operations based on, for example, a listen-before-talk (LBT) protocol.
[0056] In V2X scenarios, the UE 202 or AN 208 may be or act as a roadside unit (RSU), which may refer to any transportation infrastructure entity used for V2X communications. An RSU may be implemented in or by a suitable AN or a stationary (or relatively stationary) UE. An RSU implemented in or by: a UE may be referred to as a “UE-type RSU”; an eNB may be referred to as an “eNB-type RSU”, a gNB may be referred to as a “gNB-type RSU”; and the like. In one example, an RSU is a computing device coupled with radio frequency circuitry located on a roadside that provides connectivity support to passing vehicle UEs. The RSU may also include internal data storage circuitry' to store intersection map geometry, traffic statistics, media, as well as applications/ software to sense and control ongoing vehicular and pedestrian traffic. The RSU may provide very low latency communications required for high-speed events, such as crash avoidance, traffic warnings, and the like. Additionally, or alternatively, the RSU may provide other cellular/WLAN communications services. The components of the RSU may be packaged in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for outdoor installation and may include a network interface controller to provide a wired connection (e.g., Ethernet) to a traffic signal controller or a backhaul network.
[0057] In some embodiments, the RAN 204 may be an LTE RAN 210 with eNBs, for example, eNB 212. The LTE RAN 210 may provide an LTE air interface with the following characteristics: sub-carrier spacing (SCS) of 15 kHz; CP-OFDM waveform for downlink (DL) and SC-FDMA waveform for uplink (UL); turbo codes for data and TBCC for control; etc. The LTE air interface may rely on CSI-RS for CSI acquisition and beam management;
PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS for PDSCH/PDCCH demodulation; and CRS for cell search and initial acquisition, channel quality measurements, and channel estimation for coherent demodulation/detection at the UE. The LTE air interface may operate on sub-6 GHz bands.
[0058] In some embodiments, the RAN 204 may be an NG-RAN 214 with gNBs, for example, gNB 216, or ng-eNBs, for example, ng-eNB 218. The gNB 216 may connect with 5G-enab1ed UEs using a 5G NR interface. The gNB 216 may connect with a 5G core through an NG interface, which may include an N2 interface or an N3 interface. The ng-eNB 218 may also connect with the 5G core through an NG interface but. may connect with a UE via an LTE air interface. The gNB 216 and the ng-eNB 218 may connect over an Xn interface.
[0059] In some embodiments, the NG interface may be split into two parts, an NG user plane (NG-U) interface, which carries traffic data between the nodes of the NG-RAN 214 and a UPF 248 (e.g., N3 interface), and an NG control plane (NG-C) interface, which is a signaling interface between the nodes of the NG-RAN214 and an AMF 244 (e.g., N2 interface). [0060] The NG-RAN 214 may provide a 5G-NR air interface with the following characteristics: variable SCS; CP-OFDM for DL, CP-OFDM and DFT-s-OFDM for UL, polar, repetition, simplex, and Reed-Muller codes for control and LDPC for data. The 5G-NR air interface may rely on CSI-RS, PDSCH/PDCCH DMRS similar to the LTE air interface. The 5G-NR air interface may not use a CRS but may use PBCH DMRS for PBCH demodulation; PTRS for phase tracking for PDSCH and tracking reference signal for time tracking. The 5G-NR air interface may operate on FR1 bands that include sub-6 GHz bands or FR2 bands that include bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz. The 5G-NR air interface may include a synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) block (SSB ) that is an area of a downlink resource grid that includes PSS/SSS/PBCH.
[0061] In some embodiments, the 5G-NR air interface may utilize BWPs (bandwidth parts) for various purposes. For example, BWP can be used for dynamic adaptation of the SCS. For example, the UE 202 can be configured with multiple BWPs where each BWP configuration has a different SCS. When a BWP change is indicated to the UE 202, the SCS of the transmission is changed as well. Another use case example of BWP is related to power saving. In particular, multiple BWPs can be configured for the UE 202 with different amounts of frequency resources (for example, PRBs) to support data transmission under different traffic loading scenarios. A BWP containing a smaller number of PRBs can be used for data transmission with a small traffic load while allowing power saving at the UE 202 and in some cases at the gNB 216. A BWP containing a larger number of PRBs can be used for scenarios with higher traffic loads.
[0062] The RAN 204 is communicatively coupled to CN 220 that includes network elements to provide various functions to support data and telecommunications services to customers/subscribers (for example, users of UE 202). The components of the CN 220 may be implemented in one physical node or separate physical nodes. In some embodiments, NFV may be utilized to virtualize any or all of the functions provided by the network elements of the CN 220 onto physical compute/storage resources in seivers, switches, etc. A logical instantiation of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network slice, and a logical instantiation of a portion of the CN 220 may be referred to as a network sub- slice.
[0063] In some embodiments, the CN 220 may be connected to the LTE radio network as part of the Enhanced Packet System (EPS) 222, which may also be referred to as an EPC (or enhanced packet core). The EPC 222 may include MME 224, SGW 226, SGSN 228, HSS 230, PGW 232, and PCRF 234 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the EPC 222 may be briefly introduced as follows.
[0064] The MME 224 may implement mobility management functions to track the current location of the UE 202 to facilitate paging, bearer activation/deactivation, handovers, gateway selection, authentication, etc.
[0065] The SGW 226 may terminate an SI interface toward the RAN and route data packets between the RAN and the EPC 222. The SGW 226 may be a local mobility anchor point for inter-RAN node handovers and also may provide an anchor for inter-3GPP mobility. Other responsibilities may include lawful intercept, charging, and some policy enforcement.
[0066] The SGSN 228 may track the location of the UE 202 and perform security functions and access control. In addition, the SGSN 228 may perform inter-EPC node signaling for mobility between different RAT networks; PDN and S-GW selection as specified by MME 224; MME selection for handovers, etc. The S3 reference point between the MME 224 and the SGSN 228 may enable user and bearer information exchange for inter-3 GPP access network mobility in idle/active states.
[0067] The HSS 230 may include a database for network users, including subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions. The HSS 230 can provide support for routing/roaming, authentication, authorization, naming/addressing resolution, location dependencies, etc. An S6a reference point between the HSS 230 and the MME 224 may enable the transfer of subscription and authentication data for authenticating/authorizing user access to the LTE CN 220.
[0068] The PGW 232 may terminate an SGi interface toward a data network (DN) 236 that may include an application/ content server 238. The PGW 232 may route data packets between the LTE CN 220 and the data network 236. The PGW 232 may be coupled with the SGW 226 by an S5 reference point to facilitate user plane tunneling and tunnel management. The PGW 232 may further include a node for policy enforcement and charging data collection (for example, PCEF). Additionally, the SGi reference point between the PGW 232 and the data network 236 may be an operator external public, a private PDN, or an intra-operator packet data network, for example, for provision of IMS services. The PGW 232 may be coupled with a PCRF 234 via a Gx reference point.
[0069] The PCRF 234 is the policy and charging control element of the LTE CN 220. The PCRF 234 may be communicatively coupled to the app/content server 238 to determine appropriate QoS and charging parameters for service flows. The PCRF 234 may provision associated rules into a PCEF (via Gx reference point) with appropriate ITT and QCI.
[0070] In some embodiments, the CN 220 may be a 5GC 240. The 5GC 240 may include an AUSF 242, AMF 244, SMF 246, UPF 248, NSSF 250, NEF 252, NRF 254, PCF 256, UDM 258, and AF 260 coupled with one another over interfaces (or “reference points”) as shown. Functions of the elements of the 5GC 240 may be briefly introduced as follows.
[0071] The AUSF 242 may store data for authentication of UE 202 and handle authentication -related functionality. The AUSF 242 may facilitate a common authentication framework for various access types. In addition to communicating with other elements of the 5GC 240 over reference points as shown, the AUSF 242 may exhibit a Nausf service-based interface.
[0072] The AMF 244 may allow other functions of the 5GC 240 to communicate with the UE 202 and the RAN 204 and to subscribe to notifications about mobility events with respect to the UE 202. The AMF 244 may be responsible for registration management (for example, for registering UE 202), connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception of AMF -related events, and access authentication and authorization. The AMF 244 may provide transport for SM messages between the UE 202 and the SMF 246, and act as a transparent proxy for routing SM messages. AMF 244 may also provide transport for SMS messages between UE 202 and an SMSF. AMF 244 may interact with the AUSF 242 and the UE 202 to perform various security anchor and context management functions. Furthermore, AMF 244 may be a termination point of a RAN CP interface, which may include or be an N2 reference point between the RAN 204 and the AMF 244; and the AMF 244 may be a termination point of NAS (Nl) signaling, and perform NAS ciphering and integrity protection. AMF 244 may also support NAS signaling with the UE 202 over an N3 IWF interface.
[0073] The SMF 246 may be responsible for SM (for example, session establishment, tunnel management between UPF 248 and AN 208); UE IP address allocation and management (including optional authorization); selection and control of UP function, confi guring traffic steering at UPF 248 to route traffic to proper destination; termination of interfaces toward policy control functions; controlling part of policy enforcement, charging, and QoS; lawful intercept (for SM^ events and interface to LI sy stem); termination of SM: parts of NAS messages; downlink data notification; initiating AN specific SM information, sent via AMF 244 over N2 to AN 208; and determining SSC mode of a session. SM may refer to the management of a PDU session, and a PDU session or “session” may refer to a PDU connectivity service that provides or enables the exchange of PDUs between the UE 202 and the data network 236.
[0074] The UPF 248 may act as an anchor point for intra-RAT and inter- RAT mobility, an external PDU session point of interconnecting to data network 236, and a branching point to support multi-homed PDU sessions. The UPF 248 may also perform packet routing and forwarding, perform packet inspection, enforce the user plane part of policy rules, lawfully intercept packets (UP collection), perform traffic usage reporting, perform QoS handling for a user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, UL/DL rate enforcement), perform uplink traffic verification (e.g., SDF-to-QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, and perform downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering. UPF 248 may include an uplink classifier to support routing traffic flows to a data network.
[0075] The NSSF 250 may select a set of network slice instances serving the UE 202. The NSSF 250 may also determine allowed NSSAI and the mapping to the subscribed S-NSSAIs if needed. The NSSF 250 may also determine the AMF set to be used to serve the UE 202, or a list of candidate AMFs based on a suitable configuration and possibly by querying the NRF 254. The selection of a set of network slice instances for the UE 202 may be triggered by the AMF 244 with which the UE 202 is registered by interacting with the NSSF 250, which may lead to a change of AMF. The NSSF 250 may interact with the AMF 244 via an N22 reference point, and may communicate with another NSSF in a visited network via an N31 reference point (not shown). Additionally, the NSSF 250 may exhibit an Nnssf service-based interface.
[0076] The NEF 252 may securely expose services and capabilities provided by 3 GPP network functions for the third party, internal exposure/re- exposure, AFs (e.g., AF 260), edge computing or fog computing systems, etc. In such embodiments, the NEF 252 may authenticate, authorize, or throttle the AFs. NEF 252 may also translate information exchanged with the AF 260 and information exchanged with internal network functions. For example, the NEF 252 may translate between an AF-Service-Identifier and an internal 5GC information. NEF 252 may also receive information from other NFs based on the exposed capabilities of other NFs. This information may be stored at the NEF 252 as structured data, or a data storage NF using standardized interfaces. The stored information can then be re-exposed by the NEF 252 to other NFs and AFs, or used for other purposes such as analytics. Additionally, the NEF 252 may exhibit a Nnef service-based interface.
[0077] The NRF 254 may support service discovery' functions, receive NF discovery requests from NF instances, and provide the information of the discovered NF instances to the NF instances. NRF 254 also maintains information on available NF instances and their supported services. As used herein, the terms “instantiate,” “instantiation,” and the like may refer to the creation of an instance, and an “instance” may refer to a concrete occurrence of an object, which may occur, for example, during the execution of program code. Additionally, the NRF 254 may exhibit the Nnrf service-based interface.
[0078] The PCF 256 may provide policy rules to control plane functions to enforce them, and may also support a unified policy framework to govern network behavior. The PCF 256 may also implement a front end to access subscription information relevant for policy decisions in a UDR of the UDM 258. In addition to communicating with functions over reference points as shown, the PCF 256 exhibits an Npcf service-based interface.
[0079] The UDM 258 may handle subscription-related information to support the network entities' handling of communication sessions and may store the subscription data of UE 202. For example, subscription data may be communicated via an N8 reference point between the UDM 258 and the AMF 244. The UDM 258 may include two parts, an application front end, and a user data repository (UDR) (not illustrated in FIG. 2). The UDR may store subscription data and policy data for the UDM 258 and the PCF 256, and/or structured data for exposure and application data (including PFDs for application detection, application request information for multiple UEs 202) for the NEF 252. A Nudr service-based interface may be exhibited by the UDR to allow the UDM 258, PCF 256, and NEF 252 to access a particular set of the stored data, as well as to read, update (e.g., add, modify), delete, and subscribe to the notification of relevant data changes in the UDR. The UDM: may include a UDM-FE, which is in charge of processing credentials, location management, subscription management, and so on. Several different front ends may serve the same user in different transactions. The UDM-FE accesses subscription information stored in the UDR and performs authentication credential processing, user identification handling, access authorization, registration/mobility management, and subscription management. In addition to communicating with other NFs over reference points as shown, the UDM 258 may exhibit the Nudm service-based interface.
[0080] The AF 260 may provide application influence on traffic routing, provide access to NEF, and interact with the policy framework for policy control.
[0081] In some embodiments, the 5GC 240 may enable edge computing by selecting operator/3rd party services to be geographically close to a point that the UE 202 is attached to the network. This may reduce latency and load on the network. To provide edge-computing implementations, the 5GC 240 may select a UPF 248 close to the UE 202 and execute traffic steering from the UPF 248 to data network 236 via the N6 interface. This may be based on the UE subscription data, UE location, and information provided by the AF 260. In this way, the AF 260 may influence UPF (re)selection and traffic routing. Based on operator deployment, when AF 260 is considered to be a trusted entity, the network operator may permit AF 260 to interact directly with relevant NFs. Additionally, the AF 260 may exhibit a Naf service-based interface.
[0082] The data network 236 may represent various network operator services, Internet access, or third-party services that may be provided by one or more servers including, for example, application/ content server 238.
[0083] FIG. 3 schematically illustrates a wireless network 300 in accordance with various embodiments. The wireless network 300 may include a UE 302 in wireless communication with AN 304. The UE 302 and AN 304 may be similar to, and substantially interchangeable with, like-named components described elsewhere herein.
[0084] The UE 302 may be communicatively coupled with the AN 304 via connection 306. The connection 306 is illustrated as an air interface to enable communicative coupling and can be consistent with cellular communications protocols such as an LTE protocol or a 5G NR protocol operating at mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies.
[0085] The UE 302 may include a host platform 308 coupled with a modem platform 310. The host platform 308 may include application processing circuitry 312, which may be coupled with protocol processing circuitry? 314 of the modem platform 310. The application processing circuitry' 312 may run various applications for the UE 302 that source/ sink application data. The application processing circuitry 312 may further implement one or more layer operations to transmit/receive application data to/from a data network. These layer operations may include transport (for example UDP) and Internet (for example, IP) operations
[0086] The protocol processing circuitry 314 may implement one or more layer operations to facilitate transmission or reception of data over the connection 306. The layer operations implemented by the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include, for example, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, and NAS operations.
[0087] The modem platform 310 may further include digital baseband circuitry 316 that may implement one or more layer operations that are “below7” layer operations performed by the protocol processing circuitry 314 m a network protocol stack. These operations may include, for example, PHY operations including one or more of HARQ-ACK functions, scrambling/descrambling, encoding/ decoding, layer mapping/ de-mapping, modulation symbol mapping, received symbol/bit metric determination, multi-antenna port precoding/ decoding, which may include one or more of space-time, space- frequency or spatial coding, reference signal generation/detection, preamble sequence generation and/or decoding, synchronization sequence generation/detection, control channel signal blind decoding, and other related functions.
[0088] The modem platform 310 may further include transmit circuitry' 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, and RF front end (RFFE) 324, which may include or connect to one or more antenna panels 326. Briefly, the transmit circuitry 318 may include a digital-to-analog converter, mixer, intermediate frequency (IF) components, etc.; the receive circuitry 320 may include an analog-to-digital converter, mixer, IF components, etc.; the RF circuitry 322 may include a low-noise amplifier, a power amplifier, power tracking components, etc.; RFFE 324 may include filters (for example, surface/bulk acoustic wave filters), switches, antenna tuners, beamforming components (for example, phase-array antenna components), etc. The selection and arrangement of the components of the transmit circuitry 318, receive circuitry 320, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326 (referred generically as “transmit/receive components”) may be specific to details of a specific implementation such as, for example, whether the communication is TDM or I DM, in mmWave or sub-6 GHz frequencies, etc. In some embodiments, the transmit/receive components may be arranged in multiple parallel transmit/receive chains, may be disposed of in the same or different chips/modules, etc.
[0089] In some embodiments, the protocol processing circuitry 314 may include one or more instances of control circuitry (not shown) to provide control functions for the transmit/receive components.
[0090] A UE reception may be established by and via the antenna panels 326, RFFE 324, RF circuitry 322, receive circuitry 320, digital baseband circuitry 316, and protocol processing circuitry 314. In some embodiments, the antenna panels 326 may receive a transmission from the AN 304 by receive- beamforming signals received by a plurality of antennas/ antenna elements of the one or more antenna panels 326.
[0091] A UE transmission may be established by and via the protocol processing circuitry 314, digital baseband circuitry 316, transmit circuitry 318, RF circuitry 322, RFFE 324, and antenna panels 326. In some embodiments, the transmit components of the UE 302 may apply a spatial filter to the data to be transmitted to form a transmit beam emitted by the antenna elements of the antenna panels 326.
[0092] Similar to the UE 302, the AN 304 may include a host platform 328 coupled with a modem platform 330. The host platform 328 may include application processing circuitry 332 coupled with protocol processing circuitry 334 of the modem platform 330. The modem platform may further include digital baseband circuitry 336, transmit circuitry 338, receive circuitry 340, RF circuitry 342, RFFE circuitry 344, and antenna panels 346. The components of the AN 304 may be similar to and substantially interchangeable with like-named components of the UE 302. In addition to performing data transmission/reception as described above, the components of the AN 304 may perform various logical functions that include, for example, RNC functions such as radio bearer management, uplink and downlink dynamic radio resource management, and data packet scheduling.
[0093] FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating components, according to some example embodiments, able to read instructions from a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (e.g., a non-transitory machine-readable storage medium) and perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein. Specifically, FIG. 4 shows a diagrammatic representation of hardware resources 400 including one or more processors (or processor cores) 410, one or more memory, ''storage devices 420, and one or more communication resources 430, each of which may be communicatively coupled via a bus 440 or other interface circuitry. For embodiments where node virtualization (e.g,, NFV) is utilized, a hypervisor 402 may be executed to provide an execution environment for one or more network slices/ sub-slices to utilize the hardware resources 400. [0094] The processors 410 may include, for example, a processor 412 and a processor 414. The processors 410 may be, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), a reduced instruction set computing (RISC) processor, a complex instruction set computing (CISC) processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), a DSP such as a baseband processor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a radio- frequency integrated circuit (RFIC), another processor (including those discussed herein), or any suitable combination thereof.
[0095] The memory/storage devices 420 may include a main memory, disk storage, or any suitable combination thereof. The memory/storage devices 420 may include but are not limited to, any type of volatile, non-volatile, or semi-volatile memory such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM ), static random access memory (SRAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), Flash memory, solid-state storage, etc.
[0096] The communication resources 430 may include interconnection or network interface controllers, components, or other suitable devices to communicate with one or more peripheral devices 404 or one or more databases 406 or other network elements via a network 408. For example, the communication resources 430 may include wired communication components (e.g., for coupling via USB, Ethernet, etc.), cellular communication components, NFC components, Bluetooth® (or Bluetooth® Low Energy) components, Wi- Fi® components, and other communication components.
[0097] Instructions 450 may comprise software, a program, an application, an applet, an app, or other executable code for causing at least any of the processors 410 to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein. The instructions 450 may reside, completely or partially, within at least one of the processors 410 (e.g., within the processor's cache memory), the memory/storage devices 420, or any suitable combination thereof. Furthermore, any portion of the instructions 450 may be transferred to the hardware resources 400 from any combination of the peripheral devices 404 or the databases 406. Accordingly, the memory of processors 410, the memory/storage devices 420, the peripheral devices 404, and the databases 406 are examples of computer-readable and machine-readable media. [0098] For one or more embodiments, at least one of the components outlined in one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to perform one or more operations, techniques, processes, and/or methods as outlined in the example sections below. For example, baseband circuitry associated with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below. For another example, circuitry associated with a UE, base station, satellite, network element, etc. as described above in connection with one or more of the preceding figures may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more of the examples set forth below in the example section.
[0099] The term “application''' may refer to a complete and deployable package, environment to achieve a certain function in an operational environment. The term “AI/ML application” or the like may be an application that contains some artificial intelligence (AI)/machine learning (ML) models and application -level descriptions. In some embodiments, an AI/ML application may be used for configuring or implementing one or more of the disclosed aspects.
[00100] The term “machine learning” or “ML” refers to the use of computer systems implementing algorithms and/or statistical models to perform a specific task(s) without using explicit instructions but instead relying on patterns and inferences. ML algorithms build or estimate mathematical model(s) (referred to as “ML models” or the like) based on sample data (referred to as “training data,” “model training information,” or the like) to make predictions or decisions without being explicitly programmed to perform such tasks.
Generally, an ML algorithm is a computer program that learns from experience with respect to some task and some performance measure, and an ML model may be any object or data structure created after an ML algorithm is trained with one or more training datasets. After training, an ML model may be used to make predictions on new datasets. Although the term “ML algorithm” refers to different concepts than the term “ML model,” these terms as discussed herein may be used interchangeably for the present disclosure.
[00101] The term “machine learning model,” “ML model,” or the like may also refer to ML methods and concepts used by an ML-assisted solution. An “ML-assisted solution” is a solution that addresses a specific use case using ML algorithms during operation. ML models include supervised learning (e.g., linear regression, k-nearest neighbor (KNN), decision tree algorithms, support machine vectors, Bayesian algorithm, ensemble algorithms, etc.) unsupervised learning (e.g., K-means clustering, principal component analysis (PCA), etc.), reinforcement learning (e.g., Q-leaming, multi-armed bandit learning, deep RL, etc.), neural networks, and the like. Depending on the implementation a specific ML model could have many sub-models as components and the ML model may train all sub-models together. Separately trained ML models can also be chained together in an ML pipeline during inference. An “ML pipeline” is a set of functionalities, functions, or functional entities specific for an ML-assisted solution, an ML. pipeline may include one or several data sources in a data pipeline, a model training pipeline, a model evaluation pipeline, and an actor.
The “actor” is an entity that hosts an ML-assisted solution using the output of the ML model inference). The term “ML training host” refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the training of the model. The term “ML inference host” refers to an entity, such as a network function, that hosts the model during inference mode (which includes both the model execution as well as any online learning if applicable). The ML-host informs the actor about the output of the ML algorithm, and the actor decides for an action (an “action” is performed by an actor as a result of the output of an ML-assisted solution). The term “model inference information” refers to information used as an input to the ML model for determining inference(s); the data used to train an ML model and the data used to determine inferences may overlap, however, “training data” and “inference data” refer to different concepts.
[00102] The disclosed techniques introduce TPC for a distributed unit (DU) command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes: [00103] (a) UL TPC for DU: UL TPC command from an IAB mobile termination (MT) to a parent DU to indicate parent DU's DL TX power adjustment; and
[00104] (b) DL. TPC for DU: DL. TPC command from a parent DU to an
IAB MT to indicate the co-located DU's DL TX power adjustment. [00105] In some aspects associated with MT RX/DU RX simultaneous operation, the received signal at an LAB DU may have interference coming from a co-located MT's DL reception (parent DU's DL transmission). There are no DL power control schemes in current IAB specifications for an IAB MT or a UE to inform its parent to adjust its DL power control. Only UL power control schemes exist including DL transmit power control (TPC) command from parent DU to an IAB MT or a UE to adjust its UL transmission power. Hence, besides DL TPC for MT, a UL TPC command for the DU to indicate to parent DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a UL TPC for DU command.
[00106] In some aspects associated with MT TX/DU TX simultaneous operation, the received signal at the parent DU may have interference coming from the DU's DL transmission. With UL power control mechanisms, a parent DU can send dynamic DL transmit power control (TPC) command for the MT to increase its UL transmission power. However, the UL transmission power is limited by the MT's capability and may not fully resolve this issue. Hence, besides DL TPC for MT, DL TPC command for DU from parent DU to an IAB MT to indicate the co-located IAB DU's DL transmission power adjustment can be introduced as a DL. TPC for DU command.
[00107] The disclosed techniques introduce a TPC command to adjust DU's DL transmission power with two schemes, namely and as mentioned above, UL TPC for DU and DL TPC for DU . The TPC for DU command field and UL/DL signaling options may be used to cany the TPC for DU command. [00108] As illustrated in FIGS. 5-6, in an IAB network, an IAB node can connect to its parent node (an IAB donor or another IAB node) through a parent backhaul (BH) link, connect to a child user equipment (UE) through a child access (AC) link, and connect to a child IAB node through a child BH link.
[00109] FIG. 5 show's a reference diagram for IAB in a standalone mode, which contains one IAB donor node 503 and multiple IAB nodes (e.g., 514, 516, 518, 522, and 524). Referring to FIG. 5, the IAB architecture 500 can include a core network (CN) 502 coupled to an IAB donor node 503. The IAB donor node 503 can include control unit control plane (CU-CP) function 504, control unit user plane (CU-UP) function 506, other functions 508, and distributed unit (DU) functions 510 and 512. The DU function 510 can be coupled via wireless backhaul links to IAB nodes 514 and 516. The DU function 512 is coupled via a wireless backhaul link to TAB node 518. TAB node 514 is coupled to a UE 520 via a wireless access link, and IAB node 516 is coupled to IAB nodes 522 and 524. The IAB node 522 is coupled to UE 528 via a wireless access link. The IAB node 518 is coupled to UE 526 via a wireless access link.
[00110] Each of the IAB nodes illustrated in FIG. 5 can include a mobile termination (MT) function and a DU function. The MI' function can be defined as a component of the mobile equipment and can be referred to as a function residing on an IAB node that terminates the radio interface layers of the backhaul Uu interface toward the IAB donor or other IAB nodes.
[00111] The IAB donor 503 is treated as a single logical node that comprises a set of functions such as gNB-DU, gNB-CU-CP 504, gNB-CU-UP 506, and potentially other functions 508. In deployment, the IAB donor 503 can be split according to these functions, which can all be either collocated or non- collocated as allowed by 3GPP NG-RAN architecture. IAB-related aspects may arise when such a split is exercised. In some aspects, some of the functions presently associated with the IAB donor may eventually be moved outside of the donor in case it becomes evident that they do not perform lAB-specific tasks.
[00112] FIG. 6 illustrates a central unit (CU)-distributed unit (DU) split and signaling in an LAB architecture 600, in accordance with some aspects. Referring to FIG. 6, the IAB architecture 600 includes an IAB donor 601, a parent IAB node 603, an IAB node 605, a child IAB node 607, and a child UE 609. The IAB donor 601 includes a CU function 602 and a DU function 604. The parent IAB node 603 includes a parent MT (P-MT) function 606 and a parent DU (P-DU) function 608. The IAB node 605 includes an MT function 610 and a DU function 612. The child IAB node 607 includes a child MT (C- MT) function 614 and a child DU (C-DU) function 616.
[00113] As illustrated in FIG. 6, RRC signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the MT functions 606, 610, and 614, as well as between the CU function 602 and the child UE (C-UE) 609. Additionally, Fl access protocol (F1AP) signaling can be used for communication between the CU function 602 of the IAB donor 601 and the DU functions of the parent LAB node 603 and the IAB node 605.
[00114] As illustrated in FIGS. 5-6, multiple IAB nodes are connected to a donor node (DN) via a wireless backhaul. A DN or a parent LAB node needs to properly allocate resources for its child IAB node under the half-duplex constraint at the child IAB node. In some aspects, the time-frequency resource allocated to the parent link may be orthogonal to the time-frequency resource allocated to the child or access link.
[00115] In an example LAB network architectures (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6), CU/DU split has been leveraged where each IAB node holds a DU and an MT function. Via the MT function, the LAB node connects to its parent LAB node or the lAB-donor like a UE. Via the DU function, the IAB node communicates with its child UEs and child MTs like a base station. In some aspects, RRC signaling is used between the CU in the LAB donor and the UE/MT, while Fl AP signaling is used between the CU and the DU in an IAB node.
[00116] FIG. 6 illustrates an example of the IAB CU/DU split architecture and signaling, w'here MT and DU in a parent LAB node are indicated as P-MT/P- DU, and MT and DU in a child IAB node are indicated as C-MT/C-DU, and a child UE is indicated as C-UE.
[00117] In some embodiments, a TDM -based DU function and an MT function may be supported within an IAB node. Extended IAB functionalities include duplexing enhancements to increase spectral efficiency and reduce latency through the support of SDM/FDM-based resource management, through simultaneous transmissions, and/or reception on lAB-nodes.
[00118] FIG. 7 illustrates LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission or reception communication scenarios 700, in accordance with some aspects. In some embodiments, simultaneous operation (transmission and/or reception) of lAB-node's child and parent links includes four cases as below (illustrated in FIG. 7):
[00119] (a) MT TX/DU TX
[00120] (b) MT RX/DU RX
[00121] (c) MT TX/DU RX [00122] (d) MT RX /DU TX
[00123] In some embodiments, if LAB MT/DU simultaneous transmission is allowed, there will be additional power control demands other than LIL power control. For example, in FIG. 7 case (b), an IAB MT function is received from its parent DU and the co-located DU is received from its child. Since DL transmission usually has higher equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) than the UL transmission, there will be a high chance that MT received power will be much higher than the co-located DU received power (un-balanced receiving power), which will cause high interference. Since UL transmission power is limited by the UE/MT capability, UL. power control in the current specification may not fully solve this issue. Hence, DL power control (MT informs its parent DU to adjust its DL transmission power) is needed for IAB backhaul.
[00124] In some aspects, to support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset (different Cases associated with an IAB network are listed below). The disclosed techniques include two TA mechanisms to support simultaneous operations:
[00125] (a) Mechanism 1 : Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced; and [00126] Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case#l TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
[00127] Current TA mechanisms in IAB specifications use Case #1 timing where all IAB DU's DL. TX timings are aligned. An IAB node will calculate its DL TX timing based on Case #1 TA. To support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the IAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset. An additional drawback of the current TA mechanism is that it does not apply for simultaneous operations.
[00128] In some aspects, for lAB-node synchronization and timing alignment, the following cases of transmission timing alignment across IAB- nodes and lAB-donors may be considered: [00129] (a) Case #1: DL transmission timing alignment across lAB-nodes and lAB-donors:
[00130] (a.l) If DL TX and UL RX are not well aligned at the parent node, additional information about the alignment is needed for the child node to properly set its DL TX timing for OTA-based timing & synchronization.
[00131] (b) Case #2: DL and UL transmission timing is aligned within an
IAB node;
[00132] (c) Case #3: DL and UL reception timing is aligned within an
IAB node;
[00133] (d) Case #4: within an lAB-node, when transmitting using case 2 while when receiving using case 3;
[00134] (e) Case #5: Case #1 for access link timing and Case 4 for backhaul link timing within an lAB-node in different time slots;
[00135] (f) Case #6 (Case #1 DL transmission timing + Case #2 UL transmission timing):
[00136] (f.1 ) The DL transmission timing for all LAB-nodes has aligned with the parent lAB-node or donor DL timing;
[00137] (f.2) The UL transmission timing of an lAB-node can be aligned with the JAB-node's DL transmission timing.
[00138] (g) Case #7 (Case #1 DL transmission timing + Case #3 UL reception timing):
[00139] (g.1 ) The DL transmission timing for all lAB-nodes has aligned with the parent lAB-node or donor DL timing;
[00140] (g.2) The UL reception timing of an l AB-node can be aligned with the lAB-node's DL reception timing;
[00141] (g.3) If DL TX and UL RX are not well aligned at the parent node, additional information about the alignment is needed for the child node to properly set its DL TX timing for OTA-based timing & synchronization.
[00142] In some aspects, Case #1 is supported for both access and backhaul link transmission timing alignment and applied to Rel-16 LAB. Case #2 - Case #5 are not supported for IAB. In some embodiments, the disclosed techniques may be based on the following timing alignment considerations: [00143] (a) Case #7 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #2 (simultaneous MT-Rx/DU-Rx).
[00144] (b) Case #6 timing may be supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #1 (simultaneous MT-Tx/DU-Tx). [00145] (c) In some aspects, Case #7 timing is supported in Rel-17 for lAB-nodes operating in multiplexing scenario Case #4 (simultaneous MT- Tx/DU-Rx).
[00146] Timing relationships for different simultaneous operations are discussed herein. For simultaneous MT-RXZDU-TX, since parent DU TX timing and DU TX timing cannot be changed, the timing relationship follows current Case #1 timing and is not discussed.
Simultaneous MT-RX/DU-RX with Case #7 Timing
[00147] FIG. 8 illustrates diagram 800 of parent IAB node mobile termination (MT) receive (Rx) / parent IAB node distributed unit (DU) Rx timing alignment, according to some embodiments.
[00148] In FIG, 8, there is illustrated the timing relationship with Case #7 timing for simultaneous parent-MT RX/parent-DU RX operation at a parent LAB node.
[00149] FIG. 9 illustrates a diagram 900 of TA case1/Tp/Tg relationship for Case #1 timing, according to some embodiments.
[00150] The parent-MT RX timing at the parent IAB node is related to parent-MT receiving propagation delay Tp0. The IAB-MT has timing advance control (original Case #1 timing) of TA with IAB-MT receiving propagation delay Tp. The following definitions may be used: [00151] (a) TAcase1: The original Case#! TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #1 timing mode;
[00152] (b) TAcase7 : The absolute Case #7 TA at IAB-MT to make parent node operating at Case #7 timing mode;
[00153] (c) Tp0: parent-MT RX propagation delay; and [00154] (d) Tp : IAB-MT RX propagation delay. [00155] The shifting offset from Case #1 TA to absolute Case #7 TA is defined as:
[00156] TAoffset,Case7 = TACase1 ---- TACase7 (1)
[00157] The TAoffset,Case7 value can be derived with the following steps: [00158] (a) IAB-MT RX timing is Tp behind DL TX timing. IAB-MT TX
Case #1 timing is TACase1 ahead of IAB-MT RX timing. →IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TACase1-Tv ahead of DL TX timing. →Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T ACase1-2Tp ahead of DL TX timing.
[00159] (b) Parent-MT RX timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing. Parent-
DU RX Case #7 timing is the same as parent-MT RX timing. → Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing.
[00160] (c) Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is TACase1-2Tp ahead of DL
TX timing (from Step a). Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing is Tp0 behind DL TX timing (from Step b). ^Parent-DU RX Case #1 timing is T ACase1-2Tp+Tp0 ahead of Parent-DU RX Case #7 timing. →IAB-MT TX Case #1 timing is TACase1-2Tp+Tp0 ahead of IAB-MT TX Case#7 timing. → TAoffset,Case7 = TACase1-27p+Tp0.
[00161] (d) TAcase1 =2Tp + Tq (as illustrated in FIG.. 9). → TAoffset,Case7 = TAcase1-2Tp+ Tp0 (from Step c). → TAoffset,Case7 =Tp0+ Tg .
[00162] Therefore, the following configurations for the TAs can be obtained:
[00163] TA Case# 7 = TA Case#1-TAoffset,Case#7 = 2Tp - Tp0 (2), and TAoffset,Case#7 = TA Case# 1 - TA Case# 7 = TA Case# 1 -- 2Tp + Tp0 — Tp0 + Ts (3).
[00164] As there is no fixed relationship between the propagation delay at the parent link (Tp0) and child link (Tp), the Case #7 TA in Equation (2) may be negative, which is one issue that, is addressed by the present techniques for Case #7 timing. The LAB node with Case #7 timing may also need to address the issue of different parent-DU RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to Case #7 timing and legacy IAB nodes and UEs which are still in Case #1 timing. [00165] In some aspects, the disclosed techniques address another issue to enable Case #7 timing at a parent TAB node, namely, when an lAB-MT's TA is changed from Case #1 TA to Case #7 TA, it will cause an issue for the IAB- node to decide its DL TX timing. Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX with Case #6 Timing
[00166] FIG. 10 illustrates diagram 1000 of Case #6 for MT TX/DU TX timing, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 10 illustrates the timing relationship with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX operation. LAB MT TX timing (original Case #1 timing) has timing advance control of TA0 with parent link propagation delay Tp0. To achieve Case #6 timing for simultaneous MT-TX/DU-TX at an IAB node, the MT's TX timing may be shifted to align with the DU's TX timing. The shifting offset from Case #1 timing to Case #6 timing can be easily calculated as
[00167] TAoffset,Case#6 = TA0 - Tp0 (5) [00168] The Case #6 TA will become:
[00169] TACase#6 = TA0 ---- TAoffset,Case#6 = Tp0 (6)
[00170] Both the TA offset and the Case #6 TA are positive values.
However, when Case #6 TA is transmitted instead of Case #1 TA, the LAB node may not calculate its DL TX timing based on the Case #6 TA. In addition, the parent IAB node needs to address the issue of different parent DLT RX timing from IAB nodes shifted to the new' Case #6 timing and legacy IAB nodes which are still in Case #1 timing.
Simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX
[00171] FIG. 11 illustrates a diagram 1100 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. FIG. 12 illustrates a diagram 1200 of MT TX/DU RX timing alignment, according to some embodiments. More specifically, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 illustrate trvo possible timing relationships with simultaneous MT-TX/DU-RX operation at an IAB node, either by shifting its child IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 11) or by shifting the IAB MT's TX timing (FIG. 12). The shifting offset and the new TA for child MT in FIG. 11 are (Note that. TA0 = 2Tp0 + Tg0 and TA= 2Tp + Tg): [00172] TAoffset,childMT === -ΔS === ( TA - 2Tp) ( TA0 - Tp0) = Tg Tp0 - Tg0 (7), and
[00173] TAchildMT === TA ---- T Aoffset childMT === 2Tp + Tp0 + Tg0 (8).
[00174] The shift offset and the new TA for LAB MT in FIG. 12 are:
[00175] TAoffset,MT === ΔS === (TAQ — Tp0) — (TA — 2Tp) = Tp0 + Tg0
Tq (9), and
[00176] TAMT === TA0 ---- T Aoffset,MT === Tp0 + Tg (10).
[00177] In this regard, TA offsets for the two possible timing relationships may be positive or negative, but the new TAs are positive.
[00178] The following includes a description of proposed TA mechanisms for simultaneous operations.
[00179] (A) Mechanism 1 : Transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations, and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
[00180] In this mechanism, the following two procedures may be configured: one to modify the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new TA range for simultaneous operation, and another one to introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing.
[00181] (A.1) Procedure 1 : Modify current TA transmission scheme to accommodate new TA range for simultaneous operations.
[00182] In mechanism 1, the absolute TA values according to different simultaneous operations are transmitted (Eq. (2) for MT-RX/DU-RX; Eq. (6) for MT-TX/DU-TX; Eq. (8) or Eq.(IO) for MT-TX/DU-RX), listed as below:
[00183] (a) M T-RXZDL I-RX: TAchildMT = Tp0 - 2Tp;
[00184] (b) MT-TX/DU-TX: TAMT = Tp0 ; and
[00185] (c) MT-TX/DU-RX: TAchildMT = 2Tp + Tp0 + Tg0 or
TAMT = Tp0 + Tg.
[00186] (A.1.1) Option I : modify TA command in medium access control random access response (MAC RAR). [00187] In the current 3 GPP specification, the TA is given as TTA =
(NTA + NTA,offset) • Tc (e.g., TS38.211-4.3.1), where the value of (note that this is a fixed offset and not the offset discussed in this disclosure) depends on the duplex mode of the cell in which the uplink transmission takes place and the frequency range (FR) and is defined in TS38.133 Table 7.1.2-2. NTA is further calculated by NTA = TA • 16 • 64/2μ where TA = 0,1,2, ... ,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the TA command in MAC RAR.
[00188] In some aspects, to support simultaneous operations, in this mechanism, the TA range may be changed, to accommodate possibly negative TA for MT-RXZDU-RX. One option is to pre-define a minimum TA min value, which can be negative and transmit positive TA, sim in TA command in MAC RAR. The new TA (TTA, sim) may be determined as follows:
[00189] (a) TTA, sim === (NTA, sim + NTA,offset ) • Tc: and
[00190] (b) NTA, sim = ' 16 • 64/2μ
[00191] In one embodiment, TA, min === ---- 3846 is defined and TA, sim ===
0,1,2, ... ,7692 is communicated in MAC RAR, which needs to extend the current 12 bits TA command field in MAC ICAR to 13 bits.
[00192] (A. 1.2) Option 2: modify the TA command in MAC CE.
[00193] In the current 3GPP specification, the TA can be further modified in the TA command in the MAC CE. With the MAC CE TA command (6 bits), it indicates an index value of For subcarrier spacing of 2 kHz, with a current value, the new value, can be calculated as NTA_ new = NTA_ old + (TA --- 31) • 16 • 64/2μ .
[00194] To support mechanism 1 for simultaneous operations, we can redefine NTA_ new Calculation as NTA_ new === NTA_ old +( TA,sim - NA, max) • 16
64/2μ , where TA max is a pre-defined value and transmit positive TA,sim in TA command MAC CE. In one embodiment, TA, max = 7692 is defined and TA,sim === 0,1,2, ... ,7755 is transmitted in TA command MAC CE, which may extend the current 6 bits TA command field in MAC CE to 13 bits.
[00195] In some aspects, Option 1 and Option 2 can be applied independently and jointly . [00196] (A.2) Procedure 2: Introduce additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing.
[00197] In mechanism 1, since the transmitted TA has been changed from Case #1 TA due to simultaneous operations, DU DL TX timing calculation originally designed based on Case #1 TA may not be conducted. The following are scenarios that may be used to stop calculating/adjusting DU DL TX timing due to mechanism 1 :
[00198] (a) For MT RX/DU RX in an IAB node, its child IAB node needs to stop calculating/adjusting child DU DL TX timing. [00199] (b) For MT TX/DU TX in an IAB node, the IAB node itself needs to stop calculating/adjusting DU DL TX timing.
[00200] (c) For MT TX/DU RX in an IAB node, either its child IAB node or the IAB node itself needs to sop calculating/adjust child DU or DU DL TX timing. [00201] In this regard, if a child IAB node needs to stop calculating/adjusting child DU DL TX timing due to its parent node's simultaneous operation, the child IAB node does not know the received TA is Case #1 TA or new TA to support simultaneous operation, hence, additional signaling to inform the child node not to calculate/adjust child DU DL TX timing is needed. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
[00202] (B) Mechanism 2: Always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset transmission according to different simultaneous operations.
[00203] In this mechanism, the Case #1 TA ( TAcase#1 ) defined in the current specification can be re-used and always transmitted, which means the current TA command RAR and TA command MAC CE may not be modified. To fulfill simultaneous operations, an additional TA offset may be configured as follows: TAsim,offset ( Eq. (4 ) for MT-RX/DU-RX; Eq.(5) for MT-TX/DU-TX; Eq. (7) or Eq. (9) for MT-TXZDU-RX) can be transmitted, listed as below: [00204] (a) Case #7 timing: MT-RX7DU-RX: TAsim,offset,childMT ==
Tg + Tp0 ;
[00205] (b) Case #6 timing: MT-TX/DU-TX: TAsim,offset,MT = TA0 --- Tp0 === Tg0 + Tp0 ;
[00206] (c) MT-TXZDU-RX: TAsim,offset,childMT == Tg --- Tp0 --- Tg0 or TAsim,offset,MT = Tp0 + Tg0 --- Tg.
[00207] After receiving the Case# 1 TA and the timing offset due to simultaneous operations, the IAB MI' can calculate the new TA for MT TX timing as TAnew — TAcase#1 --- TAsim,offset.
[00208] The benefit of mechanism 2 is that since Case #1 TA is always transmitted, DL TX timing calculation based on Case #1 timing can be always fulfilled and no additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX tinting is needed.
[00209] For transmitting the timing offset due to simultaneous operations, similar signaling as the current TA mechanism can be applied using one or more of the following options:
[00210] (a) Option 1 : introduce new field in MAC RAR;
[00211] (b) Option 2: introduce new field in existing TA command MAC
CE; and
[00212] (c) Option 3: introduce a new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE.
[00213] To support MT-RX/DU-RX (Case #7 timing) and MT-TX/DU- TX (Case #6 timing), since they are both positive and have a similar range as Case #1 timing, TA == 0,1,2, ...,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the above three options for timing offset command, and the timing offset is calculated based on the simultaneous operations as follows: TAsim,offset == Tsim,offset . 16 • 64 • Tc/2μ .
[00214] To support MT-TX/DU-RX in addition to MT-RXDU - RX and MT-TX/DU-TX, since the shifting offset may be negative, the range may need to be further extended. A minimum Tsim,offset,min the value may be pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit positive Tsim,offset in the timing offset Command. In this regard, TAsim,offset == (Tsim,offset,min + Tsim,offset) .
16 • 64/2μ .
[00215] In one embodiment, Tsim,offset,min == --- 3846 may be pre-defined and Tsim,offset = 0,1, 2, ... ,7692 is transmitted with 13 bits in the above three options for timing offset command.
[00216] In some aspects, the TA offset may be defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TAcase#1) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g.
[00217] The TA offset can also be defined as TAnew minus TACase#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar:
[00218] In some embodiments, to support simultaneous operations at an IAB node, the LAB MT TX timing or its child IAB MT TX timing may be changed from current Case #1 timing-related TA to a new TA, with corresponding TA offset. The new TAs corresponding to different simultaneous operations are MT-RXZDU-RX: TAchildMT = 2Tp - Tp0 ; MT-TX/DU-TX;
[00219] In some aspects, the TA offset corresponding to different simultaneous operations are MT-RXZDU-RX: TAsim o^set cllildMT == Tg + Tp0, Tg, where Tp0/ Tg0 are propagation delay at parent link and UL to DL switching gap at parent node; Tp/Tg are propagation delay at child link and UL to DL switching gap at the IAB node.
[00220] In some aspects, mechanism 1 may be used, which includes transmitting new TA values (positive or negative) according to different simultaneous operations; and additional signaling regarding not to calculate DL TX timing with the new TA is also introduced.
[00221] In some aspects, procedure 1 includes modifying the current TA transmission scheme to accommodate the new I' A range for simultaneous operations. In some aspects, Option 1 includes modifying the TA command in MAC RAR (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above). In some aspects, Option 2 includes modifying the TA command in MAC CE (e.g., the TA command is modified to reflect the new TA (and/or the TA offset) defined above).
[00222] In some aspects, Procedure 2 includes introducing additional signaling regarding not to calculate DU DL TX timing. This can be done by adding one bit (“0” means DU DL TX timing should not be calculated/adjusted and “ 1” means DU DL TX timing can be calculated/adjusted using the transmitted TA) in the current TA command in MAC RAR and/or TA command MAC CE.
[00223] In some aspects, Mechanism 2 includes always transmitting Case #1 TA, with additional TA offset (e.g., the newly defined TA offset discussed above) transmission according to different simultaneous operations. The following signaling options may be used: Option 1 (introduce new field in MAC RAR), Option 2 (introduce new field in existing TA command MAC CE), and Option 3 (introduce new field in a new TA offset for simultaneous operations MAC CE).
[00224] In some aspects, to support MT-RX/DU-RX (Case #7 timing) and MT-TX/DU-TX (Case #6 timing), since they are both positive and have a similar range as Case #1 timing, TA == 0,1,2, ,.,,3846 is transmitted with 12 bits in the above three options for timing offset command, and calculate the timing offset due to simultaneous operations as follows: TAsim,offset == Tsim,offset . 16 • 64 • Tc/2μ .
[00225] In some aspects, to support MT-TX/DU-RX in addition to MT- RX/DU-RX and MT-TX/DU-TX, since the shifting offset may be negative, the range may need to be further extended. A minimum Tsim,offset,min value is pre- defined, which can be negative and transmit, positive Tsim,offset in the timing offset command. The timing offset due to simultaneous operations is calculated as follows. TAsim,offset == (Tsim,offset,min + Tsim,offset) • 16 •64/2μ. Note, the TA offset is defined as the TA in Case #1 timing (TAcase#1) minus the new TA in simultaneous operation, e.g. TACase#6, TACase#7, etc. (TAnew) and TAsim,offset == TAcase#1 --- TAnew. In some aspects, the TA offset can also be defined as TAnew minus TAcase#1 as below and the signaling of the corresponding TA offset can be similar: TAsim,offset == TAnew — TACase#1. [00226] FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a new generation Node-B (gNB) (or another RAN node), an access point (AP), a wireless station (STA), a mobile station (MS), or a user equipment (UE), in accordance with some aspects and to perform one or more of the techniques disclosed herein. In alternative aspects, the communication device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other communication devices.
[00227] Circuitry (e.g., processing circuitry') is a collection of circuits implemented in tangible entities of the devi ce 1300 that include hardware (e.g., simple circuits, gates, logic, etc.). Circuitry membership may be flexible over time. Circuitries include members that may, alone or in combination, perform specified operations when operating. In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may be immutably designed to carry' out a specific operation (e.g., hardwired). In an example, the hardware of the circuitry may include variably connected physical components (e.g., execution units, transistors, simple circuits, etc.) including a machine-readable medium physically modified (e.g., magnetically, electrically, moveable placement of invariant massed particles, etc.) to encode instructions of the specific operation.
[00228] In connecting the physical components, the underlying electrical properties of a hardware constituent are changed, for example, from an insulator to a conductor or vice versa. The instructions enable embedded hardware (e.g., the execution units or a loading mechanism) to create members of the circuitry' in hardware via the variable connections to carry out portions of the specific operation when in operation. Accordingly, in an example, the machine-readable medium elements are part of the circuitry or are communicatively coupled to the other components of the circuitry when the device is operating. In an example, any of the physical components may be used in more than one member of more than one circuitry. For example, under operation, execution units may be used in a first circuit of a first circuitry at one point in time and reused by a second circuit in the first circuitry, or by a third circuit in a second circuitry at a different time. Additional examples of these components with respect to the device 1300 follow.
[00229] In some aspects, the device 1300 may operate as a standalone device or may be connected (e.g., networked) to other devices. In a networked deployment, the communication device 1300 may operate in the capacity of a server communication device, a client communication device, or both in server- client network environments. In an example, the communication device 1300 may act as a peer communication device in a peer-to-peer (P2P) (or other distributed) network environment. The communication device 1300 may be a UE, eNB, PC, a tablet PC, an STB, a PDA, a mobile telephone, a smartphone, a web appliance, a network router, switch or bridge, or any communication device capable of executing instructions (sequential or otherwise) that specify actions to be taken by that communication device. Further, while only a single communication device is illustrated, the term "communication device" shall also be taken to include any collection of communication devices that individually or jointly execute a set (or multiple sets) of instructions to perform any one or more of the methodologies discussed herein, such as cloud computing, software as a service (SaaS), and other computer cluster configurations.
[00230] Examples, as described herein, may include, or may operate on, logic or a number of components, modules, or mechanisms. Modules are tangible entities (e.g., hardware) capable of performing specified operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner. In an example, circuits may be arranged (e.g., internally or with respect to external entities such as other circuits) in a specified manner as a module. In an example, the whole or part of one or more computer systems (e.g., a standalone, client, or server computer system) or one or more hardware processors may be configured by firmware or software (e.g., instructions, an application portion, or an application) as a module that operates to perform specified operations. In an example, the software may reside on a communication device-readable medium. In an example, the software, when executed by the underlying hardware of the module, causes the hardware to perform the specified operations.
[00231] Accordingly, the term "module" is understood to encompass a tangible entity, be that an entity that is physically constructed, specifically configured (e.g., hardwired), or temporarily (e.g., transitorily) configured (e.g., programmed) to operate in a specified manner or to perform part or all of any operation described herein. Considering examples in which modules are temporarily configured, each of the modules need not be instantiated at any one moment in time. For example, where the modules comprise a general-purpose hardware processor configured using the software, the general-purpose hardware processor may be configured as respective different modules at different times. The software may accordingly configure a hardware processor, for example, to constitute a particular module at one instance of time and to constitute a different module at a different instance of time.
[00232] The communication device (e.g., UE) 1300 may include a hardware processor 1302 (e.g., a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a hardware processor core, or any combination thereof), a main memory 1304, a static memory 1306, and a storage device 1307 (e.g., hard drive, tape drive, flash storage, or other block or storage devices), some or all of which may communicate with each other via an interlink (e.g., bus) 1308. [00233] The communication device 1300 may further include a display device 1310, an alphanumeric input device 1312 (e.g., a keyboard), and a user interface (UI) navigation device 1314 (e.g., a mouse). In an example, the display device 1310, input device 1312, and UI navigation device 1314 may be a touchscreen display. The communication device 1300 may additionally include a signal generation device 1318 (e.g., a speaker), a network interface device 1320, and one or more sensors 1321, such as a global positioning system (GPS) sensor, compass, accelerometer, or another sensor. The communication device 1300 may include an output controller 1328, such as a serial (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), parallel, or other wired or wireless (e.g., infrared (IR), near field communication (NFC), etc. ) connection to communicate or control one or more peripheral devices (e.g., a printer, card reader, etc.).
[00234] The storage device 1307 may include a communication device- readable medium 1322, on which is stored one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324 (e.g,, software) embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein. In some aspects, registers of the processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory 1306, and/or the storage device 1307 may be, or include (completely or at least partially), the device-readable medium 1322, on which is stored the one or more sets of data structures or instructions 1324, embodying or utilized by any one or more of the techniques or functions described herein. In an example, one or any combination of the hardware processor 1302, the main memory 1304, the static memory' 1306, or the mass storage 1316 may constitute the device-readable medium 1322.
[00235] As used herein, the term "device-readable medium" is interchangeable with “computer-readable medium” or “machine-readable medium”. While the communication device-readable medium 1322 is illustrated as a single medium, the term "communication device-readable medium" may include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, and/or associated caches and servers) configured to store the one or more instructions 1324. The term "communication device-readable medium" is inclusive of the terms “machine-readable medium” or “computer-readable medium”, and may include any medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions (e.g., instructions 1324) for execution by the communication device 1300 and that causes the communication device 1300 to perform any one or more of the techniques of the present disclosure, or that is capable of storing, encoding or carrying data structures used by or associated with such instructions. Non-limiting communication device-readable medium examples may include solid-state memories and optical and magnetic media. Specific examples of communication device-readable media may include non- volatile memory, such as semiconductor memory devices (e.g., Electrically Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and flash memory'- devices; magnetic disks, such as internal hard disks and removable disks; magneto- optical disks; Random Access Memory (RAM), and CD-ROM and DVD-ROM disks. In some examples, communication device-readable media may include non-transitory communication device-readable media. In some examples, communication device-readable media may include communication device- readable media that is not a transitory propagating signal. [00236] Instructions 1324 may further be transmitted or received over a communications network 1326 using a transmission medium via the network interface device 1320 utilizing any one of a number of transfer protocols. In an example, the network interface device 1320 may include one or more physical jacks (e.g., Ethernet, coaxial, or phonejacks) or one or more antennas to connect to the communications network 1326. In an example, the network interface device 1320 may include a plurality of antennas to wirelessly communicate using at least one of single-input-multiple-output (SIMO), MIMO, or multiple- input-single-output (MISO) techniques. In some examples, the network interface device 1320 may wirelessly communicate using Multiple User MIMO techniques.
[00237] The term "transmission medium" shall be taken to include any intangible medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or carrying instructions for execution by the communication device 1300, and includes digital or analog communications signals or another intangible medium to facilitate communication of such software. In this regard, a transmission medium in the context of this disclosure is a device-readable medium.
[00238] The terms “machine-readable medium,” “computer-readable medium,” and “device-readable medium” mean the same thing and may be used interchangeably in this disclosure. The terms are defined to include both machine-storage media and transmission media. Thus, the terms include both storage devices/media and carrier waves/modulated data signals.
[00239] Described implementations of the subject matter can include one or more features, alone or in combination as illustrated below by way of examples.
[00240] Example 1 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of di stributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and a Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
[00241] In Example 2, the subject matter of Example 1 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00242] In Example 3, the subject matter of Example 2 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00243] In Example 4, the subject matter of Example 3 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
[00244] In Example 5, the subject matter of Examples 3-4 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
[00245] In Example 6, the subject matter of Examples 1-5 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value. [00246] In Example 7, the subject matter of Example 6 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (M AC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00247] In Example 8, the subject matter of Examples 6-7 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command. [00248] In Example 9, the subject matter of Examples 1-8 includes, transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry; and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry.
[00249] Example 10 is an apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (TAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent IAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
[00250] In Example 11, the subject matter of Example 10 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (LIL) to downlink (DL.) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00251] In Example 12, the subject matter of Example 11 includes, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00252] Example 13 is a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of the distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network and to cause the parent IAB node to determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value. [00253] In Example 14, the subject matter of Example 13 includes, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
[00254] In Example 15, the subject matter of Example 14 includes, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
[00255] In Example 16, the subject matter of Example 15 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
[00256] In Example 17, the subject matter of Examples 15-16 includes, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
[00257] In Example 18, the subject matter of Examples 13-17 includes, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
[00258] In Example 19, the subject matter of Example 18 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00259] In Example 20, the subject matter of Examples 18-19 includes, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
[00260] Example 21 is at least one machine-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by processing circuitry, cause the processing circuitry to perform operations to implement any of Examples 1-20, [00261] Example 22 is an apparatus comprising means to implement any of Examples 1-20.
[00262] Example 23 is a system to implement any of Examples 1 -20.
[00263] Example 24 is a method to implement any of Examples 1-20. [00264] Although an aspect has been described with reference to specific exemplary aspects, it will be evident that various modifications and changes may be made to these aspects without departing from the broader scope of the present disclosure. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are to be regarded in an illustrative rather than a restrictive sense. This Detailed Description, therefore, is not to be taken in a limiting sense, and the scope of various aspects is defined only by the appended claims, along with the full range of equivalents to which such claims are entitled.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. An apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry' is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
2. The apparatus of claim 1 , wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
3. The apparatus of claim 2, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
5. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE). 6. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
7. The apparatus of claim 6, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
8. The apparatus of claim 6, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
9. The apparatus of any of claims 1-3, further comprising transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry, and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry .
10. An apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent TAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent TAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory' coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value,
11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
12. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset,
13. A computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul ( IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, and to cause the parent TAB node to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent LAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent LAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value.
14. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the ATI' function of the parent LAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the LAB node.
15. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 14, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the LAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
16. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message. 17, The computer-readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE). 18. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value. 19. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 18, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media, access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
20. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 18, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media. access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
What is claimed is:
1. An apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry' is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent IAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value.
2. The apparatus of claim 1 , wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
3. The apparatus of claim 2, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
5. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
6. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the processing circuitry is to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
7. The apparatus of claim 6, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
8. The apparatus of claim 6, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the TA command for transmission to the LAB node via a media access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
9. The apparatus of any of claims 1-3, further comprising transceiver circuitry coupled to the processing circuitry, and one or more antennas coupled to the transceiver circuitry .
10. An apparatus for a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the apparatus comprising: processing circuitry, wherein to configure the parent TAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, the processing circuitry is to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous transmission of first data by the MT function of the parent TAB node and transmission of second data by a DU function of the parent IAB node, the second data communicated via a downlink transmission from the DU function of the parent IAB node to an MT function of the IAB node, the downlink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value; and memory coupled to the processing circuitry and configured to store the TA value,
11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and the processing circuitry is to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the MT function of the parent IAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the IAB node.
12. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the processing circuitry is to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the downlink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the IAB node adjusted by the TA offset,
13. A computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions for execution by one or more processors of a parent Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node, the instructions to configure the parent IAB node for simultaneous operation of distributed unit (DU) and mobile termination (MT) functions in an IAB network, and to cause the parent TAB node to: determine a timing advance (TA) value based on a receive (Rx) propagation delay of an MT function of the parent IAB node and an Rx propagation delay of an MT function of an IAB node; encode configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, the configuration signaling including the TA value; and cause simultaneous reception of first data at the MT function of the parent LAB node and second data at a DU function of the parent LAB node, the second data received via an uplink transmission from the MT function of the IAB node, the uplink transmission associated with a timing advance based on the TA value.
14. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein the TA value is a TA offset, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: determine the TA offset based on the Rx propagation delay of the ATI' function of the parent LAB node and uplink (UL) to downlink (DL) switching gap at the LAB node.
15. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 14, the instructions further causing the parent LAB node to: encode the configuration signaling to include the TA offset, wherein the uplink transmission is associated with a second timing advance determined based on an existing timing advance value for the MT function of the LAB node adjusted by the TA offset.
16. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message.
17, The computer-readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein the configuration signaling is a media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
18. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein to encode the configuration signaling for transmission to the IAB node, and wherein the instructions further cause the parent IAB node to: modify a TA command based on the TA value.
19. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 18, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media, access control (MAC) random access response (RAR) message, wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
20. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 18, the instructions further causing the parent IAB node to: encode the TA command for transmission to the IAB node via a media. access control (MAC) control element (CE), wherein the timing advance of the uplink transmission is based on the TA command.
PCT/US2021/056263 2020-10-23 2021-10-22 Timing advance (ta) configurations for iab networks WO2022087419A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202063104811P 2020-10-23 2020-10-23
US63/104,811 2020-10-23

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022087419A1 true WO2022087419A1 (en) 2022-04-28

Family

ID=81290093

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2021/056263 WO2022087419A1 (en) 2020-10-23 2021-10-22 Timing advance (ta) configurations for iab networks

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022087419A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160330705A1 (en) * 2011-04-01 2016-11-10 Intel Corporation Performing multiple timing advance adjustments in a carrier aggregation communication system
WO2020202190A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 Centre Of Excellence In Wireless Technology Method and system for resource allocation and timing alignment in integrated access and backhaul (iab) network

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160330705A1 (en) * 2011-04-01 2016-11-10 Intel Corporation Performing multiple timing advance adjustments in a carrier aggregation communication system
WO2020202190A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 Centre Of Excellence In Wireless Technology Method and system for resource allocation and timing alignment in integrated access and backhaul (iab) network

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CEWIT, TEJAS NETWORKS, RELIANCE JIO, IITM, SAANKHYA LABS, IITH: "Discussion on simultaneous operation of IAB-node’s child and parent links", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2006347, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 8 August 2020 (2020-08-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051917986 *
ERICSSON: "Other enhancements for simultaneous child and parent link operation in IAB", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2006904, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 7 August 2020 (2020-08-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051915526 *
NTT DOCOMO, INC.: "Other enhancements for simultaneous operation of IAB-node’s child and parent links", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2006745, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 7 August 2020 (2020-08-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051915475 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210368581A1 (en) Ue-to-ue relay service in 5g systems
WO2022087118A1 (en) Non-terrestrial network (ntn) group handover
WO2022031544A1 (en) Dmrs for nr communications above 52.6 ghz
WO2022081531A1 (en) Device location determination in 5g non-terrestrial networks
WO2022087137A1 (en) Prs and srs configuration for nr positioning
JP2023536224A (en) Reserved signals for communications above 52.6 GHZ
WO2023137091A1 (en) Cell grouping for multi-cell scheduling
US20220053450A1 (en) Techniques for supporting low latency nr positioning protocols
WO2023069506A1 (en) New radio (nr) positioning measurement with reduced latency
WO2022087094A1 (en) Transmit power control for iab distributed units
WO2022212122A1 (en) Bwp -based operations for redcap user equipments
WO2022155125A1 (en) Cot sharing procedure for unlicensed band communications
WO2022192630A1 (en) Enhanced phase-tracking reference signal (ptrs) configurations
WO2022086929A1 (en) Processing time configuration in nr networks
US20230379839A1 (en) Enhanced sounding reference signal (srs) power control
US20230388997A1 (en) Techniques for uplink (ul) simultaneous transmission across multi-panels (stxmp)
US20230421222A1 (en) Subband reporting for full duplex operation
US20240107600A1 (en) Enhanced edge enabler client (eec) for edgeapp architectures
WO2022087419A1 (en) Timing advance (ta) configurations for iab networks
WO2023014884A1 (en) Dci enhancements for soft resource availability indication
WO2023205201A1 (en) Tdd configuration and timing at a repeater
WO2022032155A1 (en) Directional sensing indication through a qcl framework
WO2023014643A1 (en) Power scaling for uplink full power transmission
WO2023003816A1 (en) Time domain window for joint channel estimation
WO2024030640A1 (en) Network-controlled small gap (ncsg) configurations

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21883990

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21883990

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1